Bài tập Tiếng Anh 6 Lưu Hoằng Trí

August 28, 2022 | Author: Anonymous | Category: N/A
Share Embed Donate


Short Description

Download Bài tập Tiếng Anh 6 Lưu Hoằng Trí...

Description

 

 

LƯU HOẰNG TRÍ  ( G i áo viên cchuyê huyên nA Anh nh –  Trường THPT Nguyễn Thượng Hiền –  TP.  TP. HC M)

BÀI TẬP  TIẾNG ANH 6  (KHÔNG ĐÁP ÁN) 

NHÀ XUẤT BẢN ĐẠI HỌC QUỐC GIA HÀ NỘI  

 

 

L ời nói đầu  Các em học sinh thân mến!  Chúng tôi biên soạn “Bài tập Tiếng Anh 6 –  Không đáp án” dùng kèm với “Tiếng Anh 6”  của Nhà xuất bản giáo dục Việt Nam với sự hợp tác của Tập đoàn Xuất bản Giáo dục Person, và dành cho học sinh lớp 6 đã học qua Tiếng Anh lớp 3, Tiếng Anh lớp 4 và Tiếng Anh lớp 5 ở bậc Tiểu học.  Chúng tôi tập trung biên soạn các dạng bài tập nhằm phát triển năng lực giao tiếp bằng Tiếng anh thông qua kĩ năng nói, đọc, viết, trong đó có chú ý đến tâm lí lứa tuổi của học sinh lớp 6. 

Bài tập dành cho mỗi đơn vị bài học bao gồm:    

Phần A: Phonetics (Ngữ âm) 

 

Phần B: Vocabulary & Grammar (Từ vựng và ngữ pháp)  

 

Phần C: Speaking (Nói)

 

Phần D: Reading (Đọc) 

 

Phần E: Writing (Viết) 

 

Test (gồm 80 câu hỏi kiểm tra với bài tập phát triển các kĩ năng trên)  

Các bài “Test yourself” giúp học sinh tự kiểm tra những nội dung kiến thức và rèn luyện các

kĩ năng sau mỗi 3 đơn vị bài học.   Các bài tập trong “Bài tập Tiếng Anh 6 –   Không đáp án”  đa dạng, phong phú, bám sát từ vựng, ngữ pháp và chủ đề trong sách giáo khoa “Tiếng anh 6” của Nhà xuất bản Giáo dục Việt Nam và Tập đoàn Xuất bản Giáo dục Person.   Chúng tôi hi vọng rằng “Bài tập Tiếng Anh 6 –   Không đáp án”  sẽ là một  tài liệu tự học hữu ích cũng như một phương tiện hỗ trợ cho việc rèn luyện, nâng cao trình độ Tiếng Anh cho học sinh lớp 6.  Mặc dù đã có nhiều cố gắng trong việc biên soạn, song không thể tránh khỏi thiếu sót. Chúng tôi rất mong nhận được những đóng góp quý báu của các bạn đồng nghiệp và các em học sinh để cuốn sách hoàn thiện hơn trong lần tái bản sau.   Xin trân trọng cảm ơn!  Tác giả

 

 

Unit 1:

MY NEW SCHOOL

A. PHONETICS Put the words with the underlined part into the correct column.

.

 Monday club  study

month hungry home

some lunch rubber

don’t homework notebook

love subject rode

come only post

one other

overseas wonderful

go Sunday

mum country

poem video

borrow lower

/əʊ/

/ʌ/

……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….  

………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………  

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Put the words below into the correct verb group.

drawing  Maths lessons  History

painting Science breakfast Geography

basketball English lunch vocabulary

football Physics dinner the piano

volleyball homework judo the guitar

badminton pop music exercise Vietnamese

1. play: __________________________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. do: ___________________________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. have: _________________________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. study: _________________________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. School subjects. A. Do you know the subjects? What are their Vietnamese equivalents?

1. Art: 2. English: 3. Geography: 4. History: 5. Maths:

___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _________________________________ _______ ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _________________________________ _______ ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _________________________________ _______ ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _________________________________ _______ ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _________________________________ _______

6. Music: ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _________________________________ _______ 7. PE (Physical Education): ___________________________ ____________________________________________________ _________________________ 8. Science: ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _________________________________ _______ 9. ICT (Information and Communication Technology): ______________________________ ____________________________ __  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 1

 

 

B. Do you know any more subjects? Write them down.

 ________________________ _____________________________________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ C. Ask and answer the questions.

1. Which subjects do you do at school?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What's your favourite subject?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. What's your favourite school day?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. Complete the words of school things.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

t_ _ _ _ _ r d__k r_l_r p_n r _ bb _ r s _ _ __ _t p _ _ _ _ l c_ _ e _ a _ _u _ a _ or

9. b _ _ k 10. ch _ _ r. IV. Look at the picture. Write the number of the people and school things.

 ______teacher  ______student  ______desk  ______school bag

______board ______chair ______book ______pencil

______paper ______ruler ______notebook ______pen

______rubber ______pencil case ______computer

V. What are these things? Write the words in the spaces.

1. a small book to write things you want to remember 2. a small electronic machine for calculating figures 3. a small piece of rubber you use for removing pencil marks from paper 4. a soft container in which a student carries books and other things for study 5. a device used for drawing circles 6. a vehicle with two wheels, which you sit on and ride  by moving your legs  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

: _______________________ : _______________________ : _______________________ : _______________________ : _______________________ : _______________________  Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 2

 

 

7. a straight piece of wood or plastic that you use for drawing straight lines 8. a box for storing pens, pencils, erasers, etc. 9. a tool for making pencils sharper 10. a book that contains information about a subject

: _______________________ : _______________________ : _______________________ : _______________________

VI. Write the -ing form of the verb.

1. watch 2. listen

__________________ __________________

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

__________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________

swim go have skip ride sit

VII. Complete the sentences with the -ing form of the verbs. Use short forms.  Example: Come round to my place - we're listening  to  to music. (listen)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Look! The dog Don't disturb me! I She They You Look! The girls Ssh! They Listen! Someone

in the river! (swim) a good book. (read) her holiday. (enjoy) a computer game. (play) your homework. (do) in the schoolyard. (skip) in the library. (study) at the door. (knock)

VIII. Complete the sentences with am, iiss or are. 1. A: Where's Jack? B: He playing football. 2. A: Let's play table tennis. having dinner now. B: Sorry. We 3. A: Where are Linda and Kate? B: They shopping. 4. A: Are you OK? having great fun. B: Yes, I 5. A: Please help me. reading a book. B: Sorry. I 6. A: Can I talk to Lan? B: She isn't at home. She riding her bike. IX. Complete the sentences with the verbs in the present continuous.

have

1. 2. Right now John Mary 3. Andy and Amy 4. Which CD  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

listen

you

not watch

read

speak

play

basketball breakfast? It's timewith to gothetoschool school.team. a DVD. They're playing computer game. to?  Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 3

 

 

5. Please be quiet! I 6. What language

my book. she

?

X. Put the words in the correct order.

1. my/ I/ doing/ homework/ love.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. to/ cinema/ They/ going/ like/ the.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. watching/ don't/ We/ TV/ like.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. like/ sister/ reading/ doesn't/ My/ magazines.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. dad/ music/ enjoys/ My/ to/ listening/ country.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. enjoy/ on/ They/ photos/ taking/ holiday.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XI. Write the verbs in the negative form.  Example: I'm enjoying my holiday.  I'm  I'm not enjoying my holiday.

1. He's doing his homework.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. They are playing tennis.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Linda's having breakfast now.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Steve's sleeping.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. We're listening to the teacher.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. It's raining.  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7.  __________________________________________________ The students are doing morning exercises.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. She's interviewing some students.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  go,, pla lay, y, he help lp,, ha havve. XII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb: go

l. 2. 3. 4.

Our cat I I My sister

5. 6. 7. 8.

We a new classmate, Mai. We to school from Mondays to Fridays. My father to work at 7 o'clock every morning. On Sundays, my sister shopping.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

football! computer games in the evening. my sister with her homework. me to clean my bike.

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 4

 

 

XIII. Complete the sentences with the negative form of the verb.  Example: He likes Science, but he doesn't like History.

l. 2. 3. 4. 5.

She speaks English, but she I understand Maths, but I He helps me with Science, but he I borrow books about English, but I You play the guitar, but you

French. Science. me with Maths. books about History. the piano.

XIV. Match the questions and answers. Write the answer in each blank.

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

l. Are they cooking dinner? 2. Is he disturbing you? 3. Are you listening to music? 4. Are they watching TV? 5. Are you doing your Maths homework? 6. Is he enjoying his holiday?

a. No, they aren't. They're cooking dinner. b. No, I'm not. c. No, I'm not. I'm doing my English homework. d. Yes, he is. He loves Italy. e. No, they aren't. They're watching TV. f. No, he isn't.

XV. Match the questions and answers. Write the answer in each blank.

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

1. What are you watching? 2. What kind of programmes do you watch? 3. Where are you going? 4. Where does she live? 5. Who are you talking with? 6. How often do you ride your bicycle to school?

a. I like programmes about History. b. To my friend's house. c. Every day. d. A programme about animals. e. A friend from school. f. 24, High Street.

XVI. Complete the sentences with the present simple or the present continuous form the verbs.

1. They often their parents in the holidays. (visit) 2. I really cooking. (like) 3. He can't speak on the phone because he a shower. (have) 4. Look at that man. He a horse. (ride) 5. We sometimes to the cinema on Sunday. (go) 6. I about three DVDs a week. (watch) 7. We tennis now. (play) 8. Right now we French. (speak) 9. I sometimes the guitar in a band. (play) 10. When Susie usually her homework? (do) 11. I German. (not understand) 12. they chocolate ice cream? (like) C. SPEAKING I. Complete the following conversations. A.   Nam:  Good morning, Miss Hong.  Miss Hong:  (1) , Nam. (2) are (3) ?  Nam:  I'm (4) , (5) . And you?  Miss Hong:  (6) , thanks. B.  You:  Hi, Mai. (1) our new classmate. Her name is Hoa.  Mai:  (2) , Hoa.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 5

 

 

 Hoa: 

(3)

, Mai.

 Nam:   Hung:   Ba:   Nam:   Ba:   Nam:   Ba:   Hung:   Nam: 

Hello, Hung. Hi. Nice to (1) you again. Nam, this is Ba. (2) , Nam. (3) to meet you. Hi. Where are you (4) ? I am from Nha Trang. I am new here. What class are you (5) ? I'm (6) Class 6A. Yeah. He is our (7) classmate. Oh, we are (8) to have you in our class.

C. 

II. Practice the sample conversation between Tom and Susan. Then work with a partner, prepare and practice a telephone conversation. Use your own ideas. Tom: Hi, Tom speaking. Susan:  Hi, Tom. It's Susan here. What are you doing? Tom:  I'm playing Super Hero III . It's great. Susan:  Oh, can I come to your place? Tom:  Sure. III. Fill in the blanks with correct words or phrases, and then practise the conversations.

l. TV programmes. A: I'm watching B: I'm watching 2. Music. A: I'm listening to B: I'm listening to 3. Computer games. A: I'm playing B: I'm playing

. It's great! . It's fantastic! . It's great . It's wonderful! . It's great! . It's fantastic.

IV. Work with a partner. Ask and answer the questions.

1. What language do you usually sspeak peak with your ffamily? amily?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What language are you speaking now  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. What music do yyou ou usually listen to?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. What music are yyou ou listening listening to now?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Who are you sitting next to right now.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. Who do you usually ssit it next to at dinner?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ D. READING I. Read Tim's diary and decide if the sentences below are T (True) or F (False).

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 6

 

 

Monday:

Thursday:

It's Monday evening. I'm very happy. A great day at Today I'm OK. Have a good time with my school. And a good film on TV! classmates! Tuesday:

Friday:

I'm so angry. A lot of homework!

I'm not sad. I'm happy. Great test!

Wednesday:

Saturday and Sunday:

I'm nervous. A test is on Friday.

Cool weekend. I'm very happy.

l. On Monday Tim is happy.

__________________

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

__________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________

On Tuesday he is and nervous. On Wednesday heangry is nervous. A test is on Friday. On Thursday he is not OK. On Friday he is angry. On Saturday and Sunday he is very happy.

II. Read the conversation, and then circle the correct answers.

Kate: Linda: Kate: Linda: Kate:

Hello! (Kate's speaking.) Hi, Kate. It's Linda here. How are things? OK. I'm doing some homework and I'm not enjoying it! Oh sorry. Am I disturbing you? No. you aren't. It's OK.

Linda: Kate:

Oh good. Listen, do you have Jack's phone number? Yeah. I do. Just a moment. Ready? It's 8693 2210.

D. READING I. Read Tim's diary and decide if the sentences below are T (True) or F (False). Monday: Thursday:

It's Monday evening. I'm very happy. A great day at Today I'm OK. Have a good time with my classmates! school. And a good film on TV! Tuesday:

Friday:

I'm so angry. A lot of homework!

I'm not sad. I'm happy. Great test!

Wednesday:

I'm nervous. A test is on Friday.

Saturday and Sunday:

Cool weekend. I'm very happy.

l. On Monday Tim is happy. 2. On Tuesday he is angry and nervous. 3. On Wednesday he is nervous. A test is on Friday. 4. On Thursday he is not OK. 5. On Friday he is angry. 6. On Saturday and Sunday he is very happy.

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

II. Read the conversation, and then circle the correct answers. Hello! (Kate's speaking.) Kate:

  Linda: Kate:  Linda:  Kate:  Linda: 

Hi. Kate. It's Linda here. How are things? OK. I'm doing some homework and I'm not enjoying it! Oh sorry. Am I disturbing you? No. you aren't, It's OK. Oh good. Listen, do you have Jack's phone number?

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 7

 

 

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Yeah. I do. Just a moment. Ready? It's 8693 2210. Kate:  Linda:  8693 2210. Thanks. Kate:  Why do you want Jack's number? It’s Steve's birthday next weekend. I want to buy him something. Linda: Kate:  Ah, clever you! You want to ask Jack what Steve likes. That's right. Linda:  Ok. But you can't talk to him now. He's playing football. Phone him after lunch. Kate:  Kate is writing letters/ doing homework . Linda is/ isn't disturbing Kate. Jack's phone number is 8693 2210/8693 2110. It's Steve's birthday tomorrow/ next weekend . Linda wants to buy a present for Steve/ Jack . She knows/ doesn't know what to buy Steve.

E. WRITING I. Make sentences using the words and phrases given to write an article about Nguyen Binh Khiem Primary School.

1. Nguyen Binh Khiem Primary School/ District 1/ Ho Chi Minh City.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. It/ have/ 36 classes/ over 800 students.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. School/ have/ contest called “Students Love Science”.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. 180 second, third, ffourth ourth grader graders/ s/ enter/ contes contest.t.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. School/ make/ each school day/ exciting day/ the students.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. Write a short paragraph about the school rules, using the present simple tense.

1. try ttoo arrive on time for school and lessons. 2. work hard, and allow others to do the same. 3. try ttoo be polite to teachers, each other and visitors. 4. follow the instructions from the teachers. 5. wear the school uniform when we come to school. 6. keep the school buil buildings dings and grounds cl clean ean and tidy. 7. have ggood ood behavior all the time. 8. not to take ffoods oods or drinks into class classrooms. rooms. 9. not to use mobile phones inside the school buildings. 10. not to smoke at school or at home.  Answers:

1. _____________________________________________________________________________________ 2. __________________________  _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ ________________________________ ______ 3. _____________________________________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ ________________________________ ______ 4. __________________________ 5. _____________________________________________________________________________________ 6. _____________________________________________________________________________________ 7. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Lưu Hoằng Trí

Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 8

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 8

 

 

8. _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9. _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10. ____________________________________________________________________________________ III. Write about your dream school using the words or phrases given.

1. have good teachers/ help students students// get interested/ subject.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. have outdoor/ indoor activities.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. students/ try/ be/ active.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. students/ learn/ both/ theory theory// practice/ all ssubjects. ubjects.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. students/ use tablets/ instead/ books.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. good canteen/ supply/ healthy food.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. good library library// help/ develop/ talents of sstudents. tudents.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. students/ use/ sport facilities/ free time.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 9

 

 

TEST (UNIT 1) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. nice B. bicycle C. rides 2. A. mine B. history C. exercise 3. A. come B. month C. mother 4. A. hope B. homework C. one 5. A. brother B. judo C. going

D. live D. library D. open D. post D. rode

6. 7. A.  science A. subject 8. A. fun 9. A. teacher 10. A. farm

C.  music C. put C. hungry C. lunch C. walk

D.  ice D. lunch D. sun D. school. D. class

C. bag

D. hats

B.  like B. club B. student B. chess B. after

II. Choose the correct answers.

11. Phong is wearing a school . A. shoes B. uniform 12. I am having a Maths lesson but I forgot my A. calculator B. bicycle 13. In Physics, we have a lot of

. I have some difficulty. C. pencil case D. pencil sharpener .

B. homework - to do C. science - to study D. vocabulary - to play morning exercise is good for you. A. Doing B. Studying C. Playing D. Having 15. At lunchtime, you can lunch in the school canteen. A. go B. be C. have D. do 16. Mai and Hoa their bicycles to school from Monday to Friday. A. rides B. ride C. is riding D. are riding 17. Nam's new school a large . A. has - playground B. have - playgrounds C. is having - playgrounds D. are having - playground 18. I often my homework school. A. study - at B. am doing - after C. do - after D. does - before

14.

A. books - to have

19. In the afternoon, I A. am reading - at

books

B. read - in

the library. C. reads - at

D. are reading - in

20. Look! They badminton with their friends. A. play B. plays C. playing D. are playing 21. What is your subject at school? A. nice B. favourite C. liking D. excited 22. Students live and study in a/an school. They only go home at weekends.. A. international B. small C. boarding D. overseas 23. In the afternoon, students many interesting clubs. A. join B. do C. play D. have 24. Creative students drawings and paintings in the club. A. B. join - English C. 25. We do are- sport excited the first day of school.  do -art A. at B. about C. with 26. My parents often help me my homework. A. with B. about C. at

D. play - judo D. in D. in

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 10

 

 

27. Nam football now. He's tired.. A. doesn’t play  B. plays C. is playing 28. Listen! Someone at the door. A. knocks B. knock C. is knocking 29. My brother and I our bicycles to school now. A. ride B. am riding C. are riding 30. Mr. Khang our class Maths. A. teach B. teaches C. does

D. isn’t playing  D. are knocking D. is riding D. starts

III. Fill the blanks with am, is, are, do, does, have.

31. How you go to school every day? 32. you hungry? 33. your brother like pop music? 34. Where you go shopping? 35. I having lunch with my new friends. 36. Now Mai watching a video clip about science. 37. Nam and Duy not doing their homework. 38. We often Maths lessons on Mondays. 39. Mr. Minh our favourite teacher. He teaches Science. 40. What you usually do at break time? IV. Complete each of the following sentences with ONE suitable word.

41. us about your new school. 42. In the afternoon students do sports in the . 43. We are about our first day at school. 44. He looks smart in his new school . 45. In Maths lessons, I bring my calculator, ruler, and . 46. Do you often your bicycle to school? 47. They are going to a new school library. 48. The school year in Viet Nam on September 5th. 49. Do you keep when your teacher is explaining the lessons? 50. Do you often help your classmates their homework? V. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B.  Answer

A

51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58.

Do you like pop music? When does school sstart? tart? What is your ffavourite avourite subject at school? What do you usually do at break time? How many students does the school have? What is your sc school hool day like? What ar aree you doing now? Do you wear your school uniform when you go to school? 59. What time do they go home? 60. How do yyou ou get to school every day?

B

a.  b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

I read in the library library.. Maths. It's very iinteresting. nteresting. Yes, I do. We are having a His History tory lesson. Over 800 students. Yes, of course. At 4 o'clock every day.

i. By bicycle.  j. School starts again next Tuesday.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 11

 

 

VI. Complete the conversation, and then practise it with your partner. (61) __________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________?? Kate: Jack: By bicycle. How about you, Kate? Kate:  I walk (62) every day. My house is near our school. Jack:  (63) __________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________?? Kate:  It's Maths. Mr. Nam teaches it and he's our favourite teacher. Jack:  Kate:  Jack:  Mary:  Jack:  Mary:  Jack:  Mary: Jack:  Mary:  Jack: 

(64) __________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________,, Jack? I play football with my classmates in the school playground. Great! I often play badminton with my classmates. (65) ____________________________________________________, Jack? I go home at 4.30 in the afternoon every day. (66) __________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________,, Jack? After school, have dinner and do my homework. (67) __________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________,, Jack? Yes, I remember all our new classmates' names. (68) __________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________,, Mary? Oh, yes, When they forget things. I can help them. (69) __________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________,, Mary? Not much. I don't have much pocket money. (70) ____________________________________________________, Jack? Yes, I am. Let's go to the canteen and have something to eat, Mary.

VII. Make sentences using the words and phrases given.

71. They/ often/ morning exercise/ do.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 72. Nam/ play football/ school team.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 73. My sister/ play/ piano/ weekends/ at.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 74. I/ study/ Maths/ English/ History/ Mondays/ on.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. ________________________ We/ eat lunch/ school canteen/_____________________________________________________ lunch time/ in.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 76. We/ read/ library/ break time/ at.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. wear/ uniform/ school/ every day.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. Today/ Mai/ not/ wear/ uniform.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. I/ excited/ first day/ school/ at.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. Susan's favourite teacher/ Science teacher.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 12

 

 

Unit 2: MY

HOME 

A. PHONETICS Ticks ( ) the correct column for the underlined part of the word.

/s/

/z/

does gets up Goes Has Lives looks  plays starts finishes misses speaks teaches writes thinks watches washes sings walks Sits moves rooms houses chairs attics desks  buildings apartments chests laptops clocks B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR. I. In which room can you find these things.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

cooker, fridge wardrobe, bed armchair, TV bath, bath-tub car, bicycle

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

/iz/

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 13

 

 

II. Put the words or phrases in the correct columns. Some words have more more than one answer.

 your bag

school

the shelves

my desk

Spain

work

the fridge

the wall

a party

my bedroom

home

the floor

In

at

on

………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   ………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………… ……………………………………   ……………………………………   ………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   III. Look at the picture. Complete the sentences with the words in the box.

on

l. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

between

There are some plates There is a cat There is a pair of shoes There are some flowers There is a man There is a door There is a blue coat There is a picture

above

in front of

under

next to

the sink. the rug. the sofa. the curtains. the cooker. the cupboard. a red and a green coat in the wardrobe. the bed.

IV. Look at the picture. Write the number next to the correct word.

 ______wardrobe  ______radiator  ______cupboard  ______armchair  ______chair  ______lamp

in

______fridge ______bed ______sofa ______carpet ______beside table

______sink ______cooker ______ table ______curtain ______rug

V. Circle the correct answer. 1.  Here is/ There are two English girls in my school. 2.  Is there/Are there a good film on tonight?

behind

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 14

 

 

3. 4. 5. 6.

There isn't/ There aren't  a  a hall in my house. There is/ There are a lot of chairs in the classroom.  Is there/ Are there blue curtains in your room? T There isn't/ There aren't  a  a lot of people in the cinema.

VI. Look at the house then close your book and say what is in each room.

 __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VII. Complete the sentences with There i s or T he herr e ar e.

1. _______________a desk desk in my room. 2. _______________green curtains in his room. 3. _______________a ssandwich andwich on the table. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

_______________a book on the floor. _______________six children children in the room. _______________nice posters posters in our classroom. _______________a cat on my bed. _______________thirty-six children in my class.

VIII. Complete the table. Positive

(1) a nice big wardrobe (2) blue curtains

Negative

Questions

There isn’t a (3) a wardrobe  bookshelf? There aren't any (4) any curtains good posters?

Positive

Yes, (5)

No, there isn't

Yes, there are

No, there aren't.

therr e is or the therr e ar ar e. IX. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the

1. “ ______________a ______________a TV in your room?”  - “ No, _______________ .” .” 

Negative

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 15

 

 

2. “ ______________ a car in the garage?” - “Yes, ______________ .” .”  two beds in your room?”  3. “ ______________ two .”  - “ No, _______________ .” 4. “ ______________ a sofa in your living room?”   - “Yes, ______________ .” .”  5. “ ______________ a lot of books in your bedroom?”   .”  - “Yes, ______________ .” 6. “ ______________ a hall in your house?”  - Yes, _______________ .” .”  7. “  _____________a lot of sandwiches in the kitchen?”  .”  - “No, ________________   ________________ .” 8. “ ______________a ______________a lot of tables and chairs in your classroom?”  .”  - “Yes, ______________ .” X. Tick the correct correct sentences and correct the wrong ones.  

1. There are three black dogs in the park. 2. Da Lat is a city beautiful. 3. There is is two good actors actors in the film. film.

    

4. there two new on DVDs in your your bag? 5. Are There is six books my desk.

 

 

XI. Write the conversations using the words below.  Example: a new pencil case in your bag/ old. Is there a new pencil case in your bag? A:  Is No, there isn't. There's an old pencil case. B:  No,

1. five DVDs on the tabled/ three. A: ________________________________________________ B:  ________________________________________________ 2. a man in in the the garden/ garden/ a woman. A:  ________________________________________________ B:  ________________________________________________ 3. six books in that bag/ seven. A. ________________________________________________ B. ________________________________________________

4. lots of cars in the the street/ street/ one car. A: ________________________________________________ B: ________________________________________________

5. thirty children in your your class/ thirty-five A: ________________________________________________ B: ________________________________________________ XII. Reorder the words and write the sentences.

1. 2. 3. 4.

TV/ big/ a/ there's. city/ beautiful/ a/ Ha Noi/ is. student/ Mai/ new/ a/ is. good/ a/ he/ friend/ is.

__________________________ ________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________ ________________ __________________________________________ __________________________ ________________ __________________________________________ __________________________ ________________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 16

 

 

5. dog/ it's/ friendly/ a. 6. ten/ are/ desks/ small/ there. 7. new/ four/ there/ cars/ are. 8. green fields/ are/ there. 9. are/ two/ pizzas/ there/ big. 10. DVD player/ is/ new/ a/ there.

__________________________ ________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________ ________________ __________________________________________ __________________________ ________________ __________________________________________ __________________________ ________________ __________________________________________ __________________________ ________________ __________________________________________ __________________________ ________________

XIII. Complete the text with the correct prepositions.

We have English lessons (1)

Room 18. There are 24 tables for students and one desk for

the (2) and (3) the walls, are lots of posters of England. s a cupboard at the There’ frontteacher. of the room thethere cupboard, there's a TV and DVD player. Sometimes we watch films. There are some bookshelves (4) the classroom. (5) the shelves, there are a lot of English books. Our books are (6) the teacher's desk. He wants to look at our homework. Our school bags are (7) the floor, and there is some food (8) the school bags. It's now 5.30 pm. We are (9) home, but our teacher is (10) school. He often stays late to prepare for tomorrow's lesson. C. SPEAKING I. Reorder the phrases to a make a conversation.

 ______ And have you got posters in your room?  ______ Yeah, he’s great. He has air hair and green eyes –  wonderful!  wonderful!  ______ Theo Walcott is in it!  ______ One or two. My favourite is an old Arsenal poster. 1 Do you have any posters on your bedroom?  ______ Oh? Why?  ______ Yes, I do. Lots. My favourite is the poster of Brad Pitt. II. Complete the conversation with the verbs below and then practice it with your classmates.

helping

watching

doing

writing

going

Conversation 1 Martin Susan  Martin Susan Martin Susan  Martin

What are you doing on Saturday, Susan? Nothing much. I'm (1) some old DVDs Aren't you going to the cinema?  No, there's nothing new. What are you doing? I'm (2) into the city centre with some friends. . Sounds good. Can I come? Sure! Good idea!

Conversation 2 Pil  Laura  Phil Laura  Pil 

What are you (3) this evening? I'm (4) my essay for English. Really? Why don't you do your essay too? We could help each other. I'm sorry, I can't. I'm (5) my dad with his new computer

D. READING  s, the herr e ar e, there’s no, and there are are no. no.  I. Complete the emails with there’ 

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 17

 

 

From Kristen

Hi Gina, Here's a picture of my city - Sydney, Australia. (1) many interesting place here. Sydney has a lot of beaches. My favourite beach is Bondi Beach. (2) a great zoo, too: Taronga Zoo. (3) a small downtown. It's the Pitt Street Mall. (4) four nice cafés and a great music store at the mall. Sydney Opera Ope ra House is famous. It's a great city. I love it. Come and visit me soon!  Kristen From Gina

Dear Kristen, Thanks for your e-mail. Sydney is beautiful. My town is very small. (5) here. (6) beaches here. (7) a small. (8) an Internet café. My town is a little boring, but I like it a lot. Bye

opera house two restaurants and

Gina II. Read the email, match the sentences halves below, and write the answer in each blank.

Hello Andrew, There is picture of my new bedroom. It’s not very big. There’ s a bed, a desk, and a chair. There are two window. The curtains are new. On the desk there is a computer and a photo of my dog, Blackie. There are six  posters in my room. There are animals on all the posters. The posters are beautiful.  Best wishes  Daniel

 _________  _________  _________  _________  _________  _________  _________  _________

1. In Daniel's room 2. Daniel’s room 3. There are two windows with new 4. There’s a computer on 5. Daniel’s pet is  6. The dog’s name 7. There are posters 8. On the posters there are

a. Daniels’ desk.  b. there’s a bed, a desk and a chair. c. a dog d. is not very big. e. lots of animals. f. in Daniels’ room. g. is Blackie h. curtains

III. Read the conversation between four students: Linda, Kate, Steve and Jack. Then answer Ye Yess or No to the questions. Linda:  What's your new bedroom like, Kate? Kate:  It's not very big. But it's really nice! Steve:  Are there any good posters? Yes, a Coldplay poster and …  Kate:  Coldplay? Who are they? Jack:  Steve:  Oh, come on, Jack! They're really famous! Kate:  And there is a nice big wardrobe, too. Jack:  Is there a bookshelf? Yes, there is. It's next to the bed. It's small, but there aren't a lot of books in my room! Kate:  Linda:  Is there a light for reading in bed? Kate:  No, there isn't. Steve:  What else is there? Well, there are blue curtains, two blue chairs and a desk. On the desk there's a …  Kate:  Computer? Jack: 

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 18

 

 

Kate:  Linda:  Kate:  Steve: 

Yes, and there is a DVD player in it! Great! Can we watch some DVDs at your place? Sure. Let's get Steve's Coldplay DVDs! OK!

Notes - curtain (n) = màn cửa. - at your place = nơi ở, nhà của bạn 

1.

Is Kate's new bedroom big?

____________

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Coldplay famous? Are Is Kate's bookshelf big? Are her curtains green? Is there a Coldplay poster in her room? Is there a wardrobe in her room? Are there a lot of books in her room? Is there a DvD player in her computer?

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

IV. Read the article about unusual houses, and then answer the questions. A house? A boat? A houseboat!

Pete and Karen Clay are from Kentucky. They have an unusual home. It's a houseboat named Fargo. Their houseboat has a living room, a dining room, a kitchen, and a bathroom, and three bedrooms. The Clay's children, Andy and Kris, love it. "It's a cool house and a fun boat,” says Kris. Up in a tree!  Grant Stone is 12, and his sister, Jenna, 8. They're only kids, but they have a house. It’s a tree house! It's in the country. It’s at their grandparents' house in Kansas. Their tree house has one room. It's a living room with a table and a few chairs. It's small, but Grant and Jenna think it's great. Grant says, "It's my favourite place! That's the name - My Place.”  Read the article again. Then complete the chart. Name

Kind of house

Name of home

The Clays The Stones Are these sentences true (T), or false (F)?

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The two bedrooms. The Clay's Clay's houseboat houseboat has is small. Grant is 12 years old. Grant has two sisters. The tree house is big.

V. Read the texts and translate them into Vietnamese. Strangest Houses in the World

D ancing H ouse Located in Czech Republic, the Dancing House was built between 1992 and 1996. It looks like a dancing couple, symbolizing the popular dancers Fred Astaire and Ginger Rogers.  Ramot Polin Apartments

The Ramot Polin Apartments in Ireland looks like hive of honeybees. There are 720 housing units in the apartments built around 1972-1975.

Number of rooms

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 19

 

 

Cube Houses

The Cube Houses in Rotterdam look like a bunch of cubes to form a roof of a base building. Each cube house represents a tree and together the houses form a grove, like a village within the city. There are three floors in this house. Enter the house from the entrance on the ground floor. Climb up the first floor to the living room and open kitchen. The second floor has two bedrooms and a  bathroom. Some of these houses have a small garden on the top floor. E. WRITING I. Make sentences from the given words or phrases.

1. There/ a bed/ corner/ the room.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Shelves/ above/ the closet.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Wardrobe/ the center/ the room.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Table/ between/ two chairs.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Lamp/ next/ the bed.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. Table/ the right/ the wardrobe.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. There/ some pictures/ the wall.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. There/ a window/ the left-side/ the room.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. Bed/ opposite/ the door.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. There/ some bottles/ the shelf.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. Write sentences about your living room, room, your kitchen and your bedroom.

l. In the living room, there's a sofa, there are two ______________________________________ ____________ _____________________________________ ___________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. In the __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ ____________________________ __  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. In the __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ ____________________________ __  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ III. Read Nadia's text about her messy desk. Write a similar text.

My desk is really messy! My pen is in my dictionary. My pencil case is on my school bag, and my pencils are on the school bag, too. My English book is behind the computer, My ruler is in my English book. My cat is on the computer. Where is my red pen? No idea!  Answer:

 ________________________ _____________________________________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 20

 

 

 ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ IV. Read the description of Susan's ideal room. Describe your ideal room.

In my ideal room, there's a big bed and there are yellow curtains. There are a lot of posters of pop stars and horses. There's a nice desk. On the desk, there's a computer with a big screen. There are two chairs, and there are lots of shelves for my books and an d DVDs. There is also a good stereo.  Answer:  In my ideal room there is..… There are.....  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 21

 

 

TEST (UNIT 2) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1.  A. beds B. clocks C. walls 2.  A. grandparents B. brothers C. uncles 3.  A. mothers B. centres C. aunts 4.  A. cities B. watches C. dishes 5.  A. books B. rooms C. walls B. villas C. tables 6.  A. clocks 7.  A. bed B. television C. chest 8.  A. fridge B. light C. living 9.  A. poster B. sofa C. own 10. A. room B. book C. door

D. tables D. fathers D. cousins D. houses D. pillows D. chairs D. toilet D. picture D. laptop D. look

II. Find which word does not belong to each group. Then read the words aloud. 11. A. town house  house  house   playground  villa   B. country house C.  playground  D. villa 12. A. living room  room  attic  apartment   kitchen  B. attic  C. apartment D. kitchen  B. sofa sofa   C. sink   D. cupboard cupboard   13. A. dishwasher   B. microwave microwave   C. fridge  fridge  D. cooker   14. A. wardrobe  wardrobe 

15. A.  bed  bed 

B. lamp lamp   III. Choose the correct answers.

C. television  television 

16. There are a lot of things  things   in Da Lat Lat . . A. see B. to see C. seeing there is a big tiger on the wall wall.. 17. It is called the Tiger room  room   A. because B. so C. but my parents and my younger sister in a town house 18. I live A. with - at B. at - at C. of - in 19. We are moving  moving  a new house the city centre soon soon.. A. to - in B. at - at C. to - from house. 20. We live in a town house, but our grandparents live in a  a  A. villa

B. country

C. apartment

21. There are two lights  lights  the ceiling ceiling.. A. at B. in C. on the wall. 22. There is a family photo  photo  A. on B. at C. in four chairs and a table the middle of the room room.. 23. There A. is - on B. is - in C. are - at 24. We need some chairs the kitchen kitchen.. A. with B. for C. at the floor . 25. There are some dirty dishes A. in B. with C. on 26. There aren't any pillows  pillows  the bed bed.. A. in B. on C. behind   behind  27. My bedroom is  is  the bathroom. bathroom. A. under B. on C. in

D. sink  

D. to seeing D. like

Ha Noi Noi.. D. with - in D. from - in D. city D. between D. next D. are - in D. on D. for D. in front of   D. next to

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 22

 

 

28. I’d  study hard for the exam exam.. A. better B. like C. be D. do 29. There are clothes on the floor –  it’s  . A. interesting B. mess C. messes D. messy 30. There a big fridge the corner. A. is - on B. is - in C. are - in D. are - on there is only one in my bedroom bedroom.. 31. There are many chairs in the kitchen,  kitchen,  A. so B. because C. but D. in 32. My bedroom is small but it has a  a  window. A. big B. small C. interesting D. old 33. Where the living room? A. is B. are C. do D. does the books? Are they the bookshelf? bookshelf?   34. Where A. is - on B. is - in C. are - in D. are - on 35. furniture  there any furniture  your new living room? room?   A. Is - in B. Is - at C. Are - in D. Are - on i sn't, t, ar ar en' t, do do, doe does, wher wher e. IV. Fill the blanks with i s, are, isn'

36. In my house there four bedrooms. 37. Where you live, Nam? 38. We staying at my uncle's house in Da Lat. 39. How many rooms there in the hotel? 40. What Mrs. Brown need for the living room? 41. they have the right things for the kitchen? 42. There any furniture in my bedroom. I need many things. 43. There any chairs in the kitchen. We need four chairs. 44. does your aunt live? 45. Which house you want to live in - a town house or a country house? V. Complete each of the following sentences with the correct preposition.

46. The kitchen is to the bathroom. 47. We live a town house. 48. Is there a picture the wall? 49. There is a ceiling fan the bedroom. 50. My town house is the city centre. VI Rewrite the following sentences keeping the same meaning.

51. There are many chairs in the kitchen. The kitchen ______________________________________________________________________________ 52. Nam lives in the city.  Nam doesn't __________________________ _____________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ________________________ 53. There are four people in my family: my parents, my brother and me. I live ___________________________________________________________________________________ 54. The television is in front of the picture. The picture is _________________________ ____________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ________________________ 55. I don't watch TV in any an y other rooms but the living room.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 23

 

 

_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________ ___ I only __________________________ VII. Complete the conversation with the phrase below, and then practise it.

 A. What else is there?  C. on it there's a computer

B . Is there a bookshelf? D . What's your new bedroom like, Kate?

E . No, there isn't   Mary:  Kate:  Jack:  Kate:  Mary:  Kate:  Steve:  Kate: 

(56) ________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________ Well, it's not very big. (57) ________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________ Yes, there is. It's small, but that's OK. Is there a light for reading in bed? (58) ________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________ (59) ________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________ Well, there are blue curtains and two chairs. There's a desk, and (60) __________________________________________________

VIII. Choose the best answer to complete the text.

You can't see our house (61) here because it is (62) the church. When you walk up Prince Street, it is (63) the left, next (64) the Black Cat Café. roomout is upstairs the right. desk (66) likeMy looking because (65) our house is (68) theI have park. aMy desk is (69) 61. A. from B. behind C. on 62. A. in B. behind C. on 63. A. on B. at C. in 64. A. in B. at C. on 65. A. in B. behind C. on 66. A. on B. at C. in 67. A. about B. of C. on 68. A. near B. on C. next 69. A. on B. in C. between 70. A. on B. and C. in

front (67) And I the bed (70) the window. the wardrobe. D. in D. between D. under D. to D. next D. next D. with D. from D. at D. behind

IX. Read the email, and then decide whether the questions are true (T), false (F) or not mentioned (NM).

Hi Marco, We are moving to our new flat on Saturday. The flat has only two bedrooms, and it has a small garden at the  back. It's good for me because it's near my school and the city centre. When you come in the front door, there's a long hall with a bathroom at the other end. The door on the right goes into the kitchen with the dining room behind it. The next room is the living room. It's a comfortable, sunny room and from there you can walk straight out into the garden. After that there's my parents' bedroom, and finally you come to my bedroom. It's next to the bathroom. I'm writing this email on my computer at my desk under the window. All my furniture is in my room now and it looks good.  Love  Alice

71. The flat doesn't have a garden. 72. Alice walks to school. 73. The dining room is behind the kitchen.

____________ ____________ ____________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 24

 

 

74. Her parents' bedroom is next to the bathroom. 75. Her bedroom doesn't have a window.

____________ ____________

X. Make sentences using the words and phrases given.

76. Mai/ best friend/ school.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. She/ love/ read/ write/ short stories.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. We/ often/ homework/ together/ and/ she/ help/ me/ lot.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. She/ know/ lot/ history/ and/ we/ chat/ it/ hours.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. Tomorrow/ we/ watch/ new film/ Disney channel/ together.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 25

 

 

Unit 3:

MY FRIENDS

A. PHONETICS Underline the sound /b/ and /p/, and then read them aloud.

 brown, black, blue, blonde, big, book, board, bear, bean, butter, bread, breakfast, begin, become, bring,  baseball, volleyball, badminton, basketball, bee, b ee, baby, bus, library, librarian, biking, bedroom, behind, beh ind, between,  but, blank, subject.  people, person, peanut, pig, pizza, popcorn, picnic, p icnic, picture, party, part, paper, sport, play, pretty, lip, parents, grandparents, pen, pencil, compass, cap, space, respect, shopping, help, happy, project, appropriate, stamp, experiment, computer. B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Who is it? Write the correct correct names of the people.

Anita is short and has dark, curly hair. Marion is short and slim. Her hair is blonde and curly. Peter is tall and has short, straight hair. Paul is tall and slim. He wears glasses and his hair is long Alison has blonde, curly hair and she is tall. Roger is short and slim and his hair is black.  is tall and wears glasses. He is quite old. Frederick  is Barbara is a bit fat, and her hair is black, long and curly.

1. _______________

2. _______________

3. _______________

4. ________________

6. _______________ 7. _______________ hass face. II. Rewrite the sentences, using have or ha  Example: Her face is round.  She has a round face. 1. My hair is black. ________________________ 2. Mrs. Huyen's eyes are round and black. ________________________ 3. His eyes are blue. ________________________ 4. Her cheeks are chubby. ________________________ 5. Miss Huong's face is round. ________________________ 6. Miss Thanh's legs are long. ________________________

8. ________________

5. _______________

III. Fill in each blank with the correct verb.  

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

She Mai He Tan

an oval Mai's hair long face. or short? - It short black hair. tall and thin. an athlete. He very strong.

short.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 26

 

 

6. What 7. What color 8. What color

those? those bikes? Nam's eyes?

IV. Fill in the blanks bl anks with the missing missin g words: word s: is, has,  or wear(s) . And translate the passage into Vietnamese. Kevin  (l) short and slim. He (2) glasses and he (3) blue eyes. His hair (4) Tom Paul Ben

 brown and curly. (5) short and slim. He (6)  brown, and (9) tall.wavy. He doesn't (10)  brown and curly. (13) short. He (14)

glasses and he (7)

green eyes. His hair (8)

glasses. He (11)

brown eyes, and his hair (12)

brown eyes and his hair (15)

long,

long, black and straight.

V. Match the halves of each sentence, and write the answer in each blank. Answer A B

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

1. We're leaving 2. Are you cleaning your 3. Jenny's coming to 4. Martin is going 5. I'm doing my

a. homework this afternoon, but then I'm free. b. room this evening? c. to the cinema with Tom tomorrow evening. d. my party on Saturday! e. for London next Sunday.

VI. Fill in each blank with the correct adjective from the box.

hard-working

shy 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

boring

funny

talkative

friendly

creative

confident

clever

kind 

It is to sit on the plane with nothing to read. I'm not very I'm at Maths. I often make mistakes in calculations. Everyone is to me. They often help me when I need. She is often at school, and she always gets good marks. The teacher wants the students to feel about asking questions when they don't understand. She always has a smile with everyone. Children are often of people they don't know.

8. He's He 's a little bit 9. It's a really 10. She's very

; he likes to talk a lot. film; everyone laughs a lot. - she writes poetry and paints.

VII. Rewrite the sentences in the negative form.

l. They are coming to London on Monday.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. He is finishing work tomorrow.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. She is spending her next holiday at home.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. He's leaving for Ha Noi tomorrow.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. We are going out tonight.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VIII. Put the words into the correct order to form the questions, and then write short answers.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 27

 

 

1. you/ are/ dinner/ to/ coming/ - no.  Are you coming to dinner? - No, I'm not.

2. playing/ the/ are/ next/ you/ game/ in/ - no.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. they/ tomorrow/ driving/ to/ to/ London/ London/ are - yes. yes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. going/ evening/ to/ is/ cinema/ she/ the/ tomorrow - yes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5.  ________________________ at/ they/ home/ evening/ this/ are/ eating - no.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ IX. Match the questions and answers, and write the answers in the blanks.

 _____  _____  _____  _____  _____  _____

1. What are you doing on Sunday? 2. Are you helping John tomorrow? 3. What's Sarah doing tomorrow? 4. Where's John meeting us? 5. Who isn't coming to the party tomorrow? 6. Are you playing football next Monday?

a. Jenny - she's visiting her mum. b. At the station, I think. c. No, we aren't playing any more matches this month. d. No, certainly not. He never helps me. e. I'm working until lunchtime. f. She's playing in the basketball tournament.

X. Complete the text. Use the present simple. My best friend

My best friend is Hannah. She (1. live) next door to me. We (2. go) to the same school  but we are in different classes. I (3. walk) to school but Hannah (4. go) by bike, because she always (5. get up) late. After school we (6. finish) our homework first, then we (7. listen) to our favourite music. I (8. like) R&B, but Hannah (9. hate) it. She (10. think) it’s  boring. She (11. love) rock music. XI. Complete the conversation with the correct form of the verbs in brackets in the present continuous. Jack:  I'm bored. Why don't you find something to do? Nick:  What can I do? Jack:  Nick:  There are lots of things you can do. This is what I (1. do) this weekend. On

Jack:  Nick: 

Friday evening I (2. meet) Jane. We (3. go) to the cinema. Then in Saturday, Tom and I (4. play) table-tennis. Then we (5. have) lunch with Sam. After lunch, Tom and Sam (6. start) their new judo classes. I (7. not go) with them because my dad (8. take) me to a basketball match. It's my mum's birthday on Sunday. She (9. not have) a big party. We (10. have) lunch at a nice restaurant near our house. Wow. You are busy. Can I come with you to the cinema on Friday? Of course, you can, Jack.

XII. Use the cues to make questions and answers about the conversation, and then match them together. Number 1 has been done for you as an example. a

1. Who/ Nick/ meet/ on Friday?

Who is Nick meeting on Friday?

 ____ 2. Where/ they/ go?  _________________________________  __________________________ _______  ____ 3. What sport/ Nick and Jane/ play?

a. He/ meet/ Jane.

He is meting Jane.

b. He/ take/ him/ to a basketball match. _______________________________ __________________________ _____ c. No/ he/ not.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 28

 

 

 __________________________ _______  _________________________________ When/ they/ play?  _________________________________  __________________________ _______ Who/ they/ meet/ for lunch?  _________________________________  __________________________ _______ Nick/ do/ yoga/ with Tom and Jack?  _________________________________  __________________________ _______ Where/ his dad/ take him?

__________________________ _____ _______________________________ d. They/ go/ to the cinema. _______________________________ __________________________ _____ e. They/ play/ on Saturday morning. _______________________________ __________________________ _____ f. They/ have lunch/ at a nice restaurant. _______________________________ __________________________ _____ g. No/ she/ not.

 __________________________  _________________________________  ____ 8. Nick's mum/ have/ a big birthday _______ party?  _________________________________  __________________________ _______  ____ 9. Where/ they/ have/ lunch?  _________________________________  __________________________ _______

_______________________________ _____ h.__________________________ They/ meet/ Sam. _______________________________ __________________________ _____ i. They/ play/ tennis. _______________________________ __________________________ _____

 ____ 4.  ____ 5.  ____ 6.  ____ 7.

C. SPEAKING I. Rearrange the phrases to make a conversation.

Conversation 1  Christina  Michelle 

 Christina 

 Michelle 

 Christina    Michelle  

1 Michelle 

Conversation 2  Oliver  1 Tim   Oliver   Tim   Oliver   Tim

I'm spending the evening at school. Really? A long evening. Yeah, we're having a video evening with our language teachers. At school? Yeah, until midnight. Cool. Can I come too? What are you doing tomorrow evening, Christina? OK. See you on Monday then! What are you doing this weekend? Oh, they're fun! There's a lot of great rides. No, thanks. I don't really like theme parks. I'm going to Luna Park with some friends. Would you like to come? Anyway, I'm going to the youth club on Saturday, then I'm going to football match on Sunday.

II. Complete the conversation with the phrases below.

I ' m meeting

I ' d lov love e to

She doesn' sn'tt i nvite me

I ' m wat atchi ching ng

Kevin Dan Kevin Dan

What are your plans for the weekend? Well, (1) DVDs tomorrow night. Do you want to watch them with me? (2) (2) , but I can't. Oh, why not?

Kevin Dan

(3) What? (4)

Jenny. She's having a party! !

III. Read the and tick ( ) the things you are doing. Then make questions to ask your partner to complete the right column.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 29

 

 

Me

My partner

-  meet friends tomorrow -  stay at home on Sunday

 

 

 

 

-   play badminton tomorrow -  do homework on Saturday

 

 

 

 

-  go to the party at the weekend

 

 

-  do homework this evening

 

 

-  cook dinner tomorrow -  have a campfire next month

   

   

-   play traditional games at the weekend

 

 

 Example: "Are you meeting friends tomorrow? -   No, I'm not. I'm visiting my grandparents. What about you? IV. Complete the following conversation. Is (l) your sister (2) Lan  Hanh  Yes, that's my sister. Lan (3) ?  No, (4) . She's tall. Hanh Lan (5) or (6) ? Hanh  Her hair is long. (7) her eyes? Lan  They are brown. Hanh  Lan  (8) ? Hanh Yes, she has chubby cheeks.

there?

D. READING I. Read the passage, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

Lan is a student in grade 6. She is tall and thin. She is light but she is not weak. She has oval face and chubby cheeks. Her hair is long and black. Her nose isn't big. It's small. She has brown eyes and white teeth. She's very nice. l.2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Lan is hasthin long hair. She andblack weak. Her cheeks are chubby. Her nose is big. Her eyes are black. She has white teeth.

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

II. Read the texts and decide if the sentences below are T (True) or F (False). Hi, my name’s Farrah. I'm twelve and I have two sisters Farrah (Turkey) 

Claire (Scotland) 

and two brothers. I live in a village about 50 kilometers from Istanbul. My favourite food is pizza. I like computer games and nature programmes. I also play football and I swim a lot. I don't have a pet  because my mum doesn't like animals. Hi, my name's Claire. I live in Dundee in Scotland. I have one brother. He's 21 and and he works in Edinburgh. My favourite food is chicken. And I also like chocolate a lot. My friend Monica and I often go to the park and in the evenings we watch TV together. We like sitcoms best. I also like reading (Monica doesn't, she doesn't even want to read the Harry Potter books) and horse riding. I have two pets: a cat and a dog.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 30

 

 

Maria (Poland) 

Sean (Ireland) 

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Hi, my name's Maria. I live in Krakow and I have two little brother. I'm thirteen and my brothers are five and eight. My favourite food is fish, but we don't often eat it. I  play handball handb all in our school team and I'm also in the swimming team. I love going to the cinema. A lot of films are in English. That's good for me. I can listen to English a lot. I buy magazines with my pocket money. I don't have a pet. Hi, I'm Sean. I'm from Sligo in Ireland. I live on a farm and I really like animals. We have lots of animals, but I don't have a real pet. We have six horses and I really like horse riding. My friends and I also play football and computer games. My dad gives me some pocket money for that.

Farrah has two sisters sisters and a brother. Farrah lives in Istanbul. Farrah's favourite food is pizza. Clare's favourite food is chicken. Clare loves sitcoms. Clare has one pet. Maria plays handball and basketball. Maria loves going to the cinema. Maria doesn't have a pet.

10. onget a farm. 11. Sean Sean lives doesn't pocket money. 12. Sean doesn't play computer games.

True

False

 

 

               

 

             





 

 

 

  

 Notes:

-   pet (n) = thú cưng  -  handball (n) = môn bóng ném

III. Culture World: Wo rld: USA

 A. Which su sum mmer Cam Camp I s F or yo you? Whi Whi ch su sum mmer ca camp would yo you u lik like e to go to? Why? Why? Millions of North American children and teenagers go to summer camps every year. At traditional camps the 'campers' do outdoor activities, for example, swimming, riding horses, or water-skiing. Many camps specialize in one activity - you can learn about ecology, music, science, and many more things. Check out our selection of camps. Mountain adventure

Walk and climb in the beautiful North Cascades (Washington State), then camp under the stars next to a lake. You learn about plants and animals and how to survive in the mountains, Calling all artists!

Be an artist at our Arts Centre for students aged 13-18. We have courses in art, dance, music and theatre. Our students have lots of fun and our ou r teachers are excellent. Circus camp

Would you like to be in a circus? We have classes for beginners and advanced students. More than 500 young people come every year and have a fantastic time with us. This year you can come too! Whale camp

Come to Grand Manan Island (between USA and Canada) and watch whales. Go round the island in a kayak and take photos of other sea animals an imals and birds. Learn about ecology ecolog y with marine biologists. Fashion design

Are you the next Louis Vuitton or Giorgio Armani? Design and make your own clothes, then wear them at the fashion show. Space camp

Meet NASA scientists and astronauts. Learn how to walk in space. See the stars in the summer sky. Design and build your own rocket.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 31

 

 

B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C.

R ead the magaz agazii ne pa pagge qui uick ckly. ly. M arch the summ summer ca cam mps with the act actii vi viti tie es. painting: ____________ animals: ____________ making clothes: ____________ walking in the country: ____________ sciences: ____________ acrobats: ____________ A r e th the e se sent nte ence ncess tr tr ue ( T) or fa f alse ( F ) . True

False

A lot of US and Canadian children and teenagers go to summer camps.     Campers can do more than one activity at some summer camps.     At the Mountain adventure camp you can sleep sleep outside.         There isn't isn't a camp for people who like dancing.     You can go on a boat at the Whale camp.     At the Space camp you can go up into space in in a rocket. T he pr oj ect ct.. Work in a group. Find out about activities you can do in different places in our country in the summer. Take Da Lat as an example. l. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D.

Name of place

D a Lat

Name of activity

hiking and climbing sightseeing

Information

Many pine forest, waterfalls. Many kinds of flowers all year round. Visit ethnic villages.

IV. READ FOR FUN: Teenage web designer

Mike Sutton, from Sydney Australia, is a webmaster and he has his own company. The company is called "Whaam! Web Creations." And he's 15 years old. He's in 10th grade at school. We asked him some questions. Here are some emails between him and us. Question:  Answer: 

Question:  Answer:  Question:  Answer:  Question:  Answer: 

Is it easy for a 15-year-old to do this work? Easy? I'm not sure - but it's exciting. I'm in the big world of business and I'm only 15. I do a lot of my work on the phone, so many people don't know that I'm only 15. And they don't ask me - so my age is not really a problem. How do you learn the things you need to know? Experience! It's the best way to learn things, I think. Sometimes I have a problem and I look at other pages on the Web to find answers. I have friends, too. Sometimes, they can help me. What is the importance of the Internet for people? I don't think it is very important, really. It's wonderful, of course - it's so easy to get information. But I don't think it is a very important thing in the world. Do you do your own programming and design? Often, yes. It's fun and hard-working. But I also have some people doing the work for me. They're all very creative people.

E. WRITING I. Write questions and short answers.  Example: you/ play football/ this afternoon - yes. A: Are you playing football this afternoon? B: Yes, I am.

1. she/ cook a meal/ meal/ for for lunch - no  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 32

 

 

2. they/ have a holiday/ in August August - no  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. you/ play computer games/ games/ tonight tonight - yes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. he/ draw pictures about Hoi An/ tomorrow - no.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5.  __________________________________________________ we/ have a campfire/ campfire/ the weekend - yes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Sarah rah is doing each evening. II. Read the diary and write what Sa Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday

go to volleyball practice work on Biology project for school with Tom do a writing course  buy Tom's present meet Monica go to Tom's party!

On Monday evening, she's going to the volleyball practice.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ III. Questionnaire & Interview. A. Write the questions to ask people you know about their future plans.

1. What/ do/ this evening?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What/ have/ for dinner this evening?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Where/ go/ on holiday/ this year? year?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. How/ go/ to school/ tomorrow?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. What/ do/ at the weekend?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ B. Then write the name name of the person and their answer below.

 Name

Answers

TEST (UNIT 3)

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 33

 

 

I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1.  A. kind B. confident C. nice 2.  A. request B. project C. neck 3.  A. foot B. book C. food 4.  A. finger B. leg C. neck 5.  A. creative B. think C. idea

D. like D. exciting D. look D. elbow D. big

II. Choose the correct answers.

6. Can you A. move

me the apple, please? B. pass

C. have

D. turn

7. Mai is the phone, chatting friends. to A. on - to B. on - on C. to - with D. to –   to 8. She is always at school, and helps other students with their homework. A. hard B. hardly C. hard-working D. work hard 9. Diana is in the art club. She likes painting pictures, and everyone enjoys them. She is very  very  . A. shy B. kind C. funny D. creative , and we can't see all of it. it. 10. The film is very  very  A. exciting B. boring C. wonderful D. easy 11. Our class is going to  to  a picnic at the zoo on Saturday. Would you like to come with us? us?   A. have B. take C. pass D. go to go home. It's so late late.. 12. It's  It's  A. now B. sure C. time D. like the lights. The room is so dark . 13. Please turn  turn  A. with B. at C. in D. on 14. Can you  you  the tables and chairs the next room? There are some more students. A. move - to B. take - in C. move - in D. take - on 15. Daisy is very  very  to take the test. She is a very good student. student. A. kind B. confident C. friendly D. talkative magazine.. magazine 16. I like reading "Muc Tim" very much. It's my A. nice B. quick C. funny D. favourite 17. My close friend, Mai, has a  a  face and hair . A. big - black B. small - short C. round - black D. short - long . He often makes me laugh.  laugh.  18. My best friend is kind and  and   A. funny B. nice C. shy D. boring 19. My brother has short hair. A. a - straight B. ∅ - long C. ∅ - curly D. a - black his parents in the field as usual. usual . 20. On Sunday Nam  Nam  A. helps  helps  B. help  help  C. is helping helping   D. helping helping   21. On Saturday Tom's parents  parents  him London to see the new film film.. A. are taking - to B. taking - to C. are going - to D. are going - in  Next summer I am working as a  teacher in a village near Hoa Binh City. City. 22. Next 22. a  A. good B. nice C. favourite D. volunteer

23. The Summer Camp is for students  students   A. age B. aged 24. We are visiting a milk farm to see  see   A. why - do B. ∅ - do 25. Linda has hair an big

 between 10 and 15. 15. C. aging D. ages they milk, cheese, and butter . C. how - make D. how - do eyes.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 34

 

 

A. blonde - small

B. a black - blue

C. blonde - blue

D. black - long

III. Read the text about Alice and correct the sentences.

This is Alice. She's English and she's from London. She's thirteen years old. She has fair hair and brown eyes. She has a small nose. Her favourite colours are red, white and blue. 26. Alice is French. ____________ 27. She's from Manchester. ____________ 28. She's 14. ____________ 29. She has black hair and brown eyes. ____________ 30. Her favourite colours are red, white and yellow.

____________

IV. Complete each of the following sentences with ONE suitable word.

31. During the Summer Camp, we are doing a treasure in the field. 32. We are singing at the school's club: it's so exciting. 33. We are a Maths test on Friday. 34. I'd like to become an MC, so I am taking a speaking class at the Youth Cultural Centre. 35. If you are born under the of Sagittarius, you are independent, freedom-loving, and confident. 36. In our Biology field , we are visiting a milk farm and we are talking with the workers. 37. It's very to listen to a ghost story at midnight. 38. Peter often plays badminton with his friends. He also swims in his free time. He's very . 39. They are going to the library to find information. They are preparing their project. 40. Anita is a volunteer teacher at the village. She's responsible for a class. She gives instructions about different Indian dishes. V. Match the statement/ question in column A with the response in column B to have short exchanges, and write the answer in each blank. Answer A B

 ______ 41. What colour of the eyes does Paul have?  ______ 42. Would you like to have a picnic on Sunday?  ______ 43. What sort of hair does she have?  ______ 44. Can you pass the pen, please?  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

45. Who's she? 46. Does she have a round face? 47. What does your new friend look like? 48. What are you doing tomorrow? 49. Who is it? 50. What do you see in the photo?

a. It's curly.  b. Yes, sure. c. She has a round face and short black hair. d. The students from your class are playing beach volleyball. e. It's my cousin, Jane. f. Of course not. She has an oval face. g. It's Minh, my best friend. He's kind and clever. h. We're taking part in in an art workshop. i. Sorry, we can't. We're visiting visiting our grandparents.  j. They're blue.

VI. Make sentences using the words and phrases given.

51. ________________________ We/ visit/ milk farm/ do/ treasure hunt/ field/ tomorrow.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 52. He/ play/ basketball/ have/ barbecued/ his friends/ Sunday evening.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 53. You/ do/ anything/ this Saturday evening?

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 35

 

 

 ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 54. Our teacher/ ask/ us/ write/ emails/ English.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 55. He/ play/ basketball/ very well/ and/ he/ sporty.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VII. Write questions for the underlined part.

56. They are visiting a milk farm on Saturday.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 57. I'm going to the judo club with my brother.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 58. I'm not going to your party because I visit my grandparents.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 59. We're working on our school project.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 60. She understands things very quickly and easily.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VIII. Find and correct the mistake in each sentence.

61. He isn't very tall so he is kind and friendly.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 62. I'm playing football on my team.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 63. We are going to Han River to watch the international firework competition, but you can watch it live on TV.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 64. She works as a volunteer teacher to a village and everyone loves her.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 65. I'm going to the river with my m y parents watching the firework display.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ IX. Complete the conversation, and then practise it with your partner. Where's Tom? Linda Peter Linda  Peter Linda  Peter  Linda  Peter

(66) in he theissport The sport centre? I think at thecentre. judo club. Do you think so? (67) . And Tom's very good at judo. Do you have a new classmate this morning? Yes, (68) a round face and long black hair. Her name's Susan. Would you introduce her to me? Yes, (69) . I think she's very (70) because she paints nice pictures.

X. Complete the text with the words in the box.

she's

fair

long

athlete

British

arms

plays

eyes

swimmer

legs 

Vicky Gates is a professional football player. She has (71) , (72) hair and blues eyes. She has long legs and very strong (73) . Vicky is American. Anita Mather is a professional sportswoman. She (74) basketball. She has very long (75) and (76) very tall.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 36

 

 

Joana Smith is an international (77) . She has short, fair hair and green eyes. She's short but she has very big shoulders. She's (78) . Jo Kelly is an (79) . She has long, dark hair and blue (80) . She has very long legs. Jo is from Nigeria.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 37

 

 

TE ST YOURS YOURSE E LF 1 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the the part underlined. 1.  A. project B. leg C. evening 2.  A. judo B. elbow C. nose 3.  A. gets B. brings C. takes 4.  A. mouth B. house C. country 5.  A. with B. mouth C. thanks

D. neck D. blond D. stops D. about D. three

II. Put the plural nouns from the box into the correct column based on the pronunciation of the final s/es.

classes  parents lamps armchairs

boards students benches tables

books engineers desks teachers

/s/

couches baskets bookcases years

telephones doors erasers windows

/z/

/iz/

……………………………………   ……………………………………   …………………………………   ……………………………………   …………………………………… …………………………………   …………………………………… ……………………………………   …………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   …………………………………   III. Find which word does not belong in each group. Then read the words aloud. 1.  A. fridge B. cooker C. microwave D. sofa 2.  A. family B. teacher C. engineer D. doctor 3.  A. his B. her C. you D. your 4.  A. classrooms B. students C. teachers D. streets 5.  A. television B. Internet C. telephone D. city 6.  A. father B. mother C. brother D. student 7.  A. Hello B. Hi C. Good night D. Good afternoon 8.  A. Bye B. Goodbye C. Good night D. Good afternoon

9.  A. chair 10. A. confident

B. apartment B. sport

C. villa C. hard-working

D. house D. creative

3. _ _ m _ _ _ s 7. _ _ _ c _ _ _ _ _ r

4. _ i _ _ _ l e 8. t _ _ _ _ o _ _

IV. Write the school things.

1. s _ a _ _ e _ e r 5. n _ _ e _ _ _ _

2. r _ _ _ _ 6. d _ _ _

V. Complete the sentences with the words given in the box.

buy souvenirs

go camping

go to a disco

swim

have an ice cream

play games

take photos

do

1. When we

we sleep in a tent.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

with hisand newdance? camera? in the sea. ? The chocolate ones are good. a treasure hunt at our summer camp.

Do Canyou he want to It's hot! I want to Would you like to You can

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 38

 

 

7. I sometimes 8. You can

like table tennis. at the shop in the town.

VI. Underline the correct words. 1. In the morning I get up/ go to bed  at  at 6 am. 2. At 6.30 I have lunch/ breakfast  with  with Mum and Dad. 3. I go to/ finish school at 6.45. 4. After school, I make/ do my homework. 5. Sometimes I play/ have computer games or go online.

6. I often listen to/ watch music in the evening. 7. On Saturday, I have/ go out  with  with my friends. VII. Tick the correct sentences and correct the wrong ones.

1. There are three black dogs in the park. 2. Ha Noi is a city beautiful.

 

3. There is is two good actors actors in the film. film.

 

4. Are there two new DVDs in your your bag? 5. There is six books under my desk.

 

 

 

VIII. Match the sentences (1-7) with the school subjects (A-G). Answer  ______

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

Sentences

Subjects A. Music B. Science C. Geography D. ICT E. PE F. History G. English

1. "London is the capital of England." 2. "Turn on your computers and go online." 3. "How do you spell 'umbrella'?" 4. This song is beautiful. Listen to.... 5. "In the year 1945, President Ho Chi Minh..." 6. Water is H20. That's hydrogen…"  7. "Are you ready? Everybody runs…" 

IX. Complete the sentences with the verbs in the present simple.

 star t  sta 1. You

2. 3. 4. 6. 7.

I We We They

nott watch no

have hav a nice dog.

nott ha no havve

spe sp eak

nott do no

any brothers or sisters, but I have five cousins. TV in the summer, but we play games in the park. homework on Sunday evenings. Vietnamese. school at 7 o'clock.

X. Underline the correct words. 1. My brother walk/ walks to school with his friends. 2. Sue don't/doesn't  like  like football. 3.  Do/ Does he speak French? 4. Our teacher give/ gives us homework every day. 5. She go/ goes to school in London. 6. My mum and dad don't/ doesn't  work  work on Saturdays. 7. There is/ are two English girls in my school. 8.  Is/ Are there a good film on tonight? 9. There is/ are a lot of chairs in the classroom.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 39

 

 

10. Is/ Are there chairs in your room? XI. Arrange the words to make correct sentences.

1. books/ are/ are/ on/ there/ bookshelf/ many/ the.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. many/ there/ how/ in/ are/ books/ school bag/ your?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. television/ the/ there/ there/ a/ living room/ in/ is.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. forty-five/ class/ students/ students/ there/ my/ my/ are/ in.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. living room/ room/ tables/ tables/ in/ there/ the/ are/ two.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. many/ there/ in/ how/ are/ the/ doors/ classroom? classroom?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XII. Complete the questions with the verbs in the present simple.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 5.

When they (finish) school? What subjects you (study) ? What sports they (do) at school? you (like) Maths? Where they (live) ? Who you (sit) next to at school?

XIII. Read the letter from George. Choose the correct answer: A, B or C.

Dear Sergio, How (l) you? (2) you want to know about a typical day at my school? I always (3) to school with my brother and my friend Steve. School starts at 7 o'clock. (4) the morning, we have five lessons, usually different subject. Then we have lunch. I (5) have lunch at school, often I go home. In In the afternoon, there (6) two lessons. My favourite subject is Geography. After school, we often play football. What about you? Bye for now, George B. go C. are 1.  A. do 2.  A. Does B. Do C. Are 3.  A. walk B. walks C. walking 4.  A. On B. In C. At 5.  A. don’t  B. not C. doesn’t   6.  A. have B. is C. are XIV. Underline the correct words. 1. This week, he is learning/ learns how to speak in public.

2. In the summer, I am swimming/ swim at the swimming pool. 3. What is she doing/ does she do  at the moment? 4. I can't talk now. I am having/ have dinner. 5.  Are you watching/ Do you watch TV right now? 6. We are staying/ stay at the beach every summer. XV. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 40

 

 

Answer

A

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

What are those? those?   Where's your house? house?   Where does he live? live?   up?   What time does she get up? start?   When do classes start? How does she go to work?

7. Does she live in town? 8. Is it noisy in town? 9. Does Nam walk to school? 10. Are there any stores opposite your house?  house? 

B

a. He lives in town.  town.    b. By motorbike. motorbike.   c.  No, she lives in the country. country.   d. It's on Nguyen Trai Street.  Street.  e. Yes, there are.  are.  h. At six in the morning. g. They're h. Yes, it is.video game rooms. i. No, he goes to school by bike.  j. At 7 in the morning.  morning. 

conversat ions. Choose the correct answers: A, B, or C; and then practice practi ce these XVI. Complete the six conversations. conversations with your partner.

1. What are you doing? A. I often watch TV. B. I'm doing my homework. C. I like listening to music. 2. I enjoy playing tennis. A. I don't like reading. B. Where do you play? C. I like listening to music. 3. It's sunny today. A. I like camping. B. How much is the ticket? C. Yes. Do you want to go to the beach? 4. I love football. A. What's your favourite team? B. Do you like football? C. I'm watching the match. 5. Can you you pick pick up the ball, please? please? A. I play football on Tuesdays. B. Yes, of course I do. C. Yes, here you are. 6. He speaks English very well. A. Can you speak more slowly, please? B. I don't understand the question. C. Yes. His mother's American. XVII. Match the questions questi ons and answers, and write the in each blank. Then answer an swer practise the short exchanges.  Answer A B  ______ 1. What are you reading? a. No, they're my old jeans

 ______ 2. How many books do you read a month?  ______ 3. Are you wearing your new jeans?  ______ 4. Do you often wear jeans?

b. About two or three hours. c. Yes, most of the time. d. It's a film about London.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 41

 

 

 ______  ______  ______  ______

5. How many hours a day do you watch TV? 6. What are you watching at the moment? 7. Is Ben playing the piano? 8. Does she usually play in the afternoon?

e. No, that's his sister. f. The Lord of the Rings. g. Yes, she always plays from 4 until 5. h. One or two.

XVIII. Reorder the conversation.

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

I'm nervous. Hi, Mary. How are you? Because tomorrow is the Maths test. Really? What's the matter? I'm not very happy. Why are you nervous?

XIX. Reorder the conversation, writing the answer in each blank, number 1 has been done for you.

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

a. Oh, in the country? Is your house big? b. Yes, I do. I live in an apartment. c. I live in the country. d. Yes, I am. My name's Thoa. What's your name? e. No. My house is not big, but my m y house has four bedrooms, a living room, a kitchen and a bathroom. Do you live in town?  ______ f. Is it noisy in the city? 1  g. Hello. Are you a new student?  ______ h. My name's Hanh. Where do you live, Thoa?  ______ i. Yes, it's very noisy here. XX. There is ONE mistake in each sentence, find and correct it.

1. What time she start work?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Nam live in a house in the country.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Are there a flower garden garden behind the house?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4.  ________________________ There is the supermarket near _____________________________________________________ my house.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. How many floors does your school there have?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. There is is an temple old near our house.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. How does Mr. Dong travels to work?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. After dinner, she do her homework.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. She goes goes to school by a bus.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. ________________________ These people live on the Nguyen Trai Street.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XXI. Complete each sentence so that it means the same as the sentence above.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 42

 

 

1. My sister goes to school on foot. My sister _______________________________________________________________________________. 2. The garden is behind Lan's Lan's house. There is ________________________________________________________________________________. 3. The bank is not far from from the post office. office. The bank is _____________________________________________________________________________. 4. There are are many flowers flowers in our garden. Our garden _____________________________________________________________________________. 5. Ba in town. Ba lives doesn't ______________________________________________________________________________. XXII. Rearrange the words to make correct sentences.

1. near/ house/ is/ your/ there/ post office/ a?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. school/ go/ your/ do/ to/ how/ students/ country/ in?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. go/ by/ to/ they/ bicycle/ school.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. work/ to/ city/ your/ your/ in/ how/ people/ do/ travel?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. motorbike/ by/ people/ travel/ work/ to.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. there/ post office/ front/ front/ your school/ in/ is/ of/ a?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. Hoa/ country/ her parents/ lives/ lives/ in/ with/ the.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. There/ beautiful garden/ left/ Ba's house/ a/ to/ is/ the/ of.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 43

 

 

Unit 4: A. I. 1.  2.  3. 

NEIGHBOURHOOD

PHONETICS Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. A. film B. city C. nice A. big B. wide C. quite A. cheap B. sleepy C. near

4. 5.   A. A. heavy  noisy

B. sea B. expensive

D. police D. exciting D. peaceful

C. team C. house

D. street D. post

II. Put the word into the correct column according to the underlined part.

Slim  Building  Live Village City

tin historic leave river street

teen peaceful sit sea convenient

/i:/

milk busy seat see difficult

meal expensive read beach thing /ɪ /

……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………. ………………………………………………   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………   B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Write the comparative for of these adjectives. 1. strong  stronger than  2. crowded more crowded than 

3. tall 4. noisy

__________________ __________________

5. pretty 6. happy 7. short 8. big 9. modern 10. friendly 11. good 12. bad

__________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________

II. Use the words and write comparison.  Example: France/ Italy. (large)

France is larger than Italy. 1. Scotland/ Athens. (cold)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Chinese/ English. (difficult)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 44

 

 

3. Jennifer Lopez/ Madonna. (pretty)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Football/ volleyball. (good)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. A novel/ a short story. (long)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ III. Write sentences, using the comparative of the adjectives.  Example: I/ my brother/ thin.

 I am thinner than my brother. 

1. This book/ that one/ good.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. The weather here/ the weather in my hometown/ hot.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. A mouse/ a cat/ small.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. A radio/ a television/ cheap.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. The sun/ the moon/ big.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. A mountain/ a hill/ high.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. A child/ a man/ young.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. A lake/ a sea/ small.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. Your hair/ my hair/ long.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. French food/ English food/ good.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ IV. Complete the following sentences with the comparatives of the adjectives. l. This chair is than that chair. (comfortable)

2. Your flat is 3. Love is 4. Iron is 5. My Physics course is 6. The Nile River is 7. The dog is 8. My mother's cooking is 9. My father's cooking is 10. This dress is 11. A horse is 12. A rose is

than mine. (large) than money. (important) than wood. (heavy). than my Math course. (difficult) than the Mississippi. (long) than a cow. (intelligent) than my father's. (good) than my mother's. (bad) than that one. (pretty) than a man. (strong) than a weed. (beautiful)

V. Complete the sentences with the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets.

l. Which river is

, the Red River or the Mekong River? (long)

2. Which country is

, China or Viet Nam? (big)

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 45

 

 

3. Which animals are , dogs or dolphins? (intelligent) 4. Which animals are , cats or horses? (fast) 5. Which is , water or oil? (heavy) 6. Which month in Viet Nam is , October or December? (cold) 7. Which language is , Chinese or English? (difficult) 8. Which city is , London or Rome? (old) 9. Which city is , New York or Paris? (big) 10. Which mountain is , Mount Everest or Mount Fuji? (high) VI. Write sentences using the words or phrases given.  Example: Her new school/ big/ her old school.  Her new school is bigger than her old school. 

l. My father/ old/ Uncle Hung.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. She/ tall/ her mother.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Winter/ cold/ spring.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Ha Noi Opera House/ House/ big/ Hai Phong Opera House.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. A house in the city centre/ expensive/ a house in the suburb.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. My neighbourhood/ crowded/ your neighbourhood.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. Travelling by train/ train/ comfortable/ travelling by coach.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. Mai/ young/ her sisters.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. Hue/ historic/ Hoi An.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. Living in the country/ peaceful/ living in the city.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VII. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the adjectives in brackets.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Our theater is than our cinema. (big) Museums are than art galleries. (interesting) The market is than the shopping centre. (cheap) The amusement park is than the swimming pool. (noisy) The French restaurant in our town is than the Italian restaurant. (expensive) Sundays are than Saturdays. (boring) My mum is than my dad. (busy) My new school is than my old school. (modern)

VIII. Complete the second sentence with the correct form of the opposite adjective.

1. The museum is bigger than than the art gallery. The art gallery the museum. 2. The sports centre is more expensive than the swimming pool.

The swimming pool

the sports centre.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 46

 

 

3. The market is older than than the shopping centre. centre. The shopping centre the market. 4. The skate park is noisier than the amusing park. The amusing park the skate park. 5. The food here is is worse worse than than my cooking! My cooking the food here! 6. The kitchen is darker than the living living room. room. The living room the kitchen. 7. I'm My quieter brother than my brother. 8. My computer is newer than my mobile phone. My mobile phone

I am. my computer.

IX. Use the information to make sentences about the Multi-screen Cinema and the Royal Cinema. Use the correct form of the adjectives given. Multi-screen Cinema

Royal Cinema

Drinks £2 Seats 500 Comfort ***** Friendly staff * My opinion: Okay 

Drink £0.80 Seats 200 Comfort ** Friendly staff **** My opinion: Very good  

bad

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

big

cheap

comfortable

Drinks in the Multi-screen Cinema are Drinks in the Royal Cinema The Multi-screen Cinema The Royal Cinema The seats in the Multi-screen Cinema The staff in the Royal Cinema In my opinion, the Royal Cinema

expensive

good

small

drinks in the Multi-screen. drinks in the Multi-screen Cinema. the Royal Cinema. the Multi-screen Cinema. the seats in the Royal Cinema. the staff in the Multi-screen Cinema. the Multi-screen Cinema.

8. In my opinion, the Multi-screen Cinema C. SPEAKING I. Complete the following conversations. A Tourist: Excuse me. Can you (1)  Hoa:  Ben Thanh Market? Go straight (3)

friendly

me the (2) . (4) the right. Ben Thanh Market is on your left. Tourist: Is there a post office near (6) ?  Hoa:  Oh, yes. It's opposite (7) market. Tourist:  Thank you very much.  Hoa:  You're (8) .

the Royal Cinema.

to Ben Thanh Market? the second turning (5)

B

Tourist:   Lan: 

Excuse me. Is (1) a restaurant near here? Oh, yes. But it's not very near here. Turn right into Tran Phu Street. (2) the turning (3) the left. You will be on Nguyen Trai Street. The restaurant is (4)

first

the end of the street.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 47

 

 

Tourist:   Lan:  Tourist:  Lan:  Tourist:  Lan:  II. Peter is at

That's so far. (5) do you go there? I walk. You should go (6) taxi. Thank you. Bye. Not at all. Bye. on the map. Fill in the gaps with the words or phrases in the box.

next to

on your right

near here

turn left

Is there 

A Peter  Man

(1) . Where's the post office? (2) this road and turn right. (3) is (4) , (5) the chemist's. Thank you very much. You're welcome.

Peter  Man

Green Road. The post office

B

on the left

That’s 

opposite

Excuse me

Go along

Peter  Woman

Excuse me. (6) a supermarket (7) ? Yes, there is. Go along this road and (8) . The supermarket is (9)

Peter

Thanks a lot.

the bank.

III. Complete the following short conversations.  Example: A: Life in the country is slower than the city life. (slow) B: Yes, it is. The city life is much faster.  1. A: The country is the city. (quiet) B:  Yes, that's true. The city is much . 2. A:  The streets of New York are the streets of Paris. (quiet) No, they aren't. They're much . B:  3. A:  Paris is London. (big) B:  B: No, it isn't. It's much .

4. A:  B:  5. A:  B: 

The Underground in London is the Metro in Paris. (good) No, it isn't. The Underground is much . The Ferrari is the Toyota. (fast) Yes, that's true. The Ferrari is .

, (10)

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 48

 

 

D. READING I. Read the following passage, and then answer the questions.

London and Rome are the two old cities in Europe. Rome is older than London, it is about 800 years older than London. But London is bigger than Rome in area and population. In general, London is colder than Rome in winter and cooler than Rome in summer. Rome is wetter than London and nearer the sea than London.  Notes: - area = diện tích  - in general = nhìn chung - Europe = châu Âu l. Which city is older?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Which city is bigger in area and population?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Is London hotter than Rome?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Which city has got more rain?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Which city is nearer the sea?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. Read the conversations and write the letters of the correct building buildin g in the signs. You are at the cross ( ) on the street. Conversation 1: Woman Excuse me, where's the post office? Man Go straight ahead as far as the shopping Woman Man 

Conversation 2: Boy  Woman  Boy  Woman  Boy  Woman 

centre. Then turn left. On the corner, there's a large bank. The post office is next to the bank. T Thank you. You're welcome.

Excuse me. Can you tell me where the Odeon Cinema is? The Odeon? Well, let me think. It's on Hill Road. How do I get there? Go straight take the first Go turning leftand andstraight go pastahead the police station. Then there's a small parkon, in front of you. past on thethe park and the cinema is next to the large music shop. Thank you. Not at all.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 49

 

 

: Post office. : Cinema  Answers:  III. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. I live in a small village called Northville. There are about 2000 people here. I love the village (1) it is very quiet and life is slow and easy. The village is always clean; people look (2) it with great care. The air is always clean, too. People are much friendlier here than in a city because everyone (3) the others, and if someone has a problem, there are always people who can help. There are only a few things that I don't like about Northville. One thing is that we have not got many things to do in the evening; we haven't got (4) cinemas or theaters. The other thing is that people always talk about (5) , and everyone knows what everyone is doing. But I still prefer village life to life in a big city. B. although C. because D. but 1.  A. so 2.  A. for B. at C. up D. after 3.  A. knows B. know C. is knowing D. knew 4.  A. little B. some C. any D. few 5.  A. others B. other C. another D. one another IV. Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

Lan goes to Nha Trang with her family on holiday now. She stays at a hotel on the side of the beach. In the early morning, she goes to the sea and swims for an hour. Then she has breakfast in a canteen on the beach to enjoy fresh air in the morning. In the afternoon, she takes some photos of the th e sights. She is staying in Nha Trang for four days and takes of a lot of nice photos. She is buying some postcards and souvenirs for her friends. It is an enjoyable holiday because she has a lot of fun. 1. Where does Lan go go on holiday now?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What does she do in the early morning?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. What does she do in in the afternoon? afternoon?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. How long is she staying staying in Nha Trang? Trang?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Why is her holiday enjoyable?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ E. WRITING I. Rearrange the words and phrases to make make meaningful meaningful sentences.

1. an/ pagoda/ village/ go/ old/ my/ has.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. railway-station/ not/ small/ a/ that/ town/ has/ got.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. one/ Mr. and Mrs. Brown/ only/ only/ have/ car/ got.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. building/ school/ new/ has got/ got/ my/ a.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. many/ got/ city/ lakes/ that/ has/ beautiful. beautiful.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. London/ parks/ has/ famous/ got/ many.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. any/ city/ museums/ your/ has/ got?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 50

 

 

galleries/ not/ town/ has/ got/ this/ this/ any. 8. art galleries/  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. buildings/ old/ got/ Hue/ pagodas/ and/ many/ has.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. a/ house/ has/ got/ garage/ your?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. Rewrite the sentences using the words in brackets. Do not change the meaning of the sentences and do not change the form of the words given.

 Example: Tom is taller than Mary. (SHORT)  Mary is shorter than Tom. 

1. The Central Post Office is bigger than this District Post office. (SMALL)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. The skyscraper is higher than our office building. building. (LOW)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. My neighbourhood is noisier than your neighbourhood. (QUIET) (QUIET)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Alice is slimmer than Daisy. (FAT)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. The Riverview Hotel is cheaper than the Palace Hotel. (EXPENSIVE)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. A house in the city is more expensive than a house in the country. country. (CHEAP)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. The air in the city is more polluted than the air in the country. (FRESH)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. Life in the city is more interesting than than life in a small village. (BORING)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ III. Write sentences about the city tour of Ha Noi, using the words and phrases given.

l. Ha Noi/ capital of Viet Nam. It/ history/ more than 1,000 years.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. First/ go/ President Ho Chi Minh's Mausoleum/ see/ stilt house/ where/ he lived/ 1958/ 1969.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Then/ go/ One-Pillar Pagoda. It/ It/ a pagoda/ over the water/ water/ middle/ a square lake. lake.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. After that/ have a chance/ visit/ Tran Quoc Pagoda/ on the shore/ West Lake.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Then/ have lunch/ restaurant/ the Old Quarter.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. Finally/ go/ Hoan Kiem Lake/ heart/ soul/ Ha Noi.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 51

 

 

TEST (UNIT 4) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. arrive B. quickly C. historic 2.  A. teens B. see C. coffee 3.  A. convenient B. evening C. exciting 4.  A. expensive B. opposite C. those 5.  A. ideal B. cinema C. exciting II. 6.  7.  8.  9. 

aloud.   Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud.  A. exciting B. boring C. interesting A. big B. tall C. wide A. suburb B. park C. memorial A. sunny B. beaches C. weather 10. A. cross B. turn C. straight

D. city D. street D. eve D. noisy D. difficult D. convenient D. expensive D. market D. supermarket D. buy

III. Choose the correct answers.

11. Is there a theatre  theatre  your neighbourhood? neighbourhood?   A. in B. on C. at the second turning the right right.. 12.

D. with

B. Take - on  C. Get - in  D. Get - on  on  in  on  . road   street   road   way  A. show - road B. show - street C. tell - road D. tell - way  14. The map map   that the art gallery is nearer than the cathedral. Shall we go there first? first ? A. speaks  speaks  B. asks  asks  C. says says   D. talks 15. A is a place where we go to buy stamps or send letters. letters . B. post  post office  office  C. cinema  cinema  D. school school   A. library  library  16. The air in this area is  is   with smoke from factories factories.. fresh  noisy  clean   polluted  B. fresh  C. noisy  D. clean A.  polluted  17. There are many shops near here, so the streets are very busy and  and   during the day. day. A. noise  noise  B. narrow C. quiet  quiet  D. noisy  noisy 

13.

A. Take - in  in 

supermarket. 18. It to liveB.far from the market and the supermarket  in  inconvenient convenient    convenient   .  easy  easy  C. convenient  A.is 19. The people in Hoi An are incredibly  incredibly  and . A. friendly - help help   B. friendly - helpful  helpful  C. friendship - helpless helpless   activities. activities. 20. The weather is nice, so I enjoy doing  doing  A. outdoor   B. inside C. outdoors 21. The cinema is  is  the corner of the street.  street.  A. on B. in C. at than going by bus bus.. 22. Going by taxi is more  more   A. cheaper   B. faster   C. easier   23. The streets in the Old Quarter in Ha Noi are not wide. They are exciting  noisy  narrow   A. exciting  B. noisy  C. narrow 24. A is a place where we can buy medicines, soap, and make-up. make-up. A. chemist’s  B. grocer’s   C. square square   25. David's exam results are are   than Nick's Nick's.. good  better   A. good  B. well C.  better 

comfortable  D. comfortable  D. friend - helpfully  helpfully  D. boring D. into D. expensive  expensive 

. quiet  D. quiet  D. temple  temple 

important   D. important

B.

A.

C.

D.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 52

 

 

are   26. Janet is not happy because her results in the competition are good   better   A. bad B. good  C. better  ago.. 27.  people own motorbikes now than ten years ago A. Many Many   B. Much  Much  C. More More   28. This type of car is is   economical than that type. type. much  more  B. much  C. many A. more  29. go past the traffic lights, and turn left left.. A. First - than  than  B. First - then  then  C. Then - first first   30. London, the capital city of England, is a  a  historic   history  B. historic A. history 

than her sister's sister's.. worse   D. worse D. Some Some   D. as D. Finally - then  then 

city with many old buildings, and beautiful parks. parks . largest   C. largest D. larger  

IV. Complete the sentences with the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets.

31. The Mekong River is the Mississippi River. (short) 32. The Caribbean Sea is the Mediterranean Sea. (large) 33. Mt. Everest is Mount Fuji. (high) 34. Africa is North America. (big) 35. Europe is South America. (small) 36. The streets in Da Nang are and than those in Hue. (noisy/ crowded) 37. Canada is the United States in area. (big) 38. Indonesia is Japan in population. (large) 39. Fruit is for your health candy. (good) 40. This exercise is that one. (easy) V. Complete each blank of the following sentences with ONE suitable word.

41. Every house in Da Nang has a frontyard and a . 42. One thing I don't like about the city is that the air is because of the smoke from factories. 43. The weather in Hue is hotter than in Ha Noi. 44. The streets in Ho Chi Minh City are busy and crowded a lot of motorbikes. 45. left and take the second on your left. Go straight and it's in of you. 46. The houses, shops, and pagodas in Hoi An are older than in other cities in Viet Nam. 47. It is very that you live near your school. 48. Hoi An is a city with a lot of old houses, shops, buildings and theatres, etc. 49. Can you tell us the to "Chua Cau", please? 50. There is a of King Ly Thai To in a small park near Ho Kiem Lake in Ha Noi. VI. Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

Many people who work in London prefer to live outside it, and to go to their offices, factories or schools everyday by train, car or bus, even though this means they have to get up earlier in the morning and come home later in the evening. One advantage of living outside London is that houses are cheaper. Even a small flat in London without a garden costs quite a lot to rent. With the same money, one can get a little house in the country with a garden of one's own. Then, in the country one can rest from the noise and hurry of the town. Although one has to get up earlier and spend more time in trains or buses, one can sleep better at night, and during weekends. In summer evenings one enjoy the fresh, clean air of the country. If one likes gardens, one can spend one's free time digging,  planting, watering and doing the hundred and one other jobs which are needed in a garden.  Notes: - even though/ although

: mặc dù 

- rent (v)

: thuê mướn 

: (   sự  ) thuận lợ i

- advantage (n)

: đào bới, xới 

- dig (v)

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 53

 

 

: tưới nước  - mean (v) : có nghĩa là : của riêng mình  51. What do many people who work in London prefer?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 52. What is one advantage of living outside London?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 53. What can a person enjoy when he lives in the country?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ - water (v) - of one's own

54. What can a person get in the country with the same money of a small flat in London?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 55. What can a person with the interest in gardening do in the country?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VII. Complete the following conversation. A Tourist:  Excuse me. Is there a hotel (56) here?  Hoa:  Yes, there is one (57) Nguyen Trai Street. Tourist:  Could you (58) me the way to that hotel?  Hoa:  Yes, of course. Go straight ahead. (59) the second turning (60)



Tourist:  Hoa: 

the

right. The hotel is beside the supermarket. Thank you very much. You're welcome.

Tourist:   Lan: 

Excuse me. Could you show me the (61) to the souvenir shop, please? Yes, of course. It's (62) here. It's (63) the corner of the first street. Go straight ahead. It's (64) the bookstore and the shoe shop. Tourist:  (65) a lot.  Lan:  OK, Not at all. VIII. Complete the passage with the words given in the box.

carpet

from

peaceful

path

however

often

flowers

for

water

fresh

My village is about 10 kilometers (66) Da Lat. It is a very beautiful and (67) place where people grow (68) and vegetables only. It is very famous (69) its pretty roses and beautiful landscapes. The air is quite fresh, (70) , the smell of the roses makes people feel cool. In spring, my village looks like a (71) with plenty of colors. Tourists come to visit it so (72) .  Nowadays, with electricity, it doesn't take the villagers much time to (73) the roses. And even at night, n ight,  people can walk along the (74) and enjoy the (75) smell of the flowers. IX. Make sentences using the words and phrases given below.

76. The Japanese Covered Bridge or o r "Chua Cau" / one/ the most famous tourist attractions/ Hoi An.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. It/ built/ early/ seventeenth century.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. "Chua Cau"/ Hoi An/ beautiful example/ Japanese architecture/ that period.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. It/ built/ by/ Japanese merchants/ make a link/ Chinese quarters/ across/ stream.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. Inside/ "Chua Cau"/ there is/ temple/ the God of Weather. People/ believe/ he/ control/ all kinds/ weather changes.

 __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 54

 

 

Unit 5:

NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD

A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct columns, according to the pronunciation of of the underlined parts.

coat, coast, but, burst, cot, cost, mat, mast, hot, host, eat, east, net, nest, boot, boost, boat, boast, bet, best, wet, west, lot, lost, pot, post, but, bu t, bust, beat, beast. /t/

/st/

……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….  

………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………  

II. Choose the correct italicized word to complete the sentences. Then read the sentences aloud. l. We walked along the coat/ coast for five minutes. 2. Put on your coat/ coast . It's very cold outside. 3. Do you like this hot/ host  weather?  weather? 4. We thank the hot/ host  for  for the lovely evening. 5. The sun sets in the wet/west . 6. Do you like wet/ west  weather?  weather? 7. There are a lot/ lost  of  of people here. 8. They always get lot/ lost  in  in London. 9. He brings in a hot tea pot/ post . 10. I will send the photo to you by pot/ post . B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR. I. Use the correct form of the adjectives.

1. city in Canada is Toronto. (large) 2. February is month of the year. (short) 3. Mt. Everest is mountain in the world. (high) 4. Russia is country in the world. (large) 5. George is student in the class. (bad) 6. New York is city in the world today. (large) 7. The story you told was of all (funny) 8. The Pacific is ocean in the world. (large) 9. January is month of the year. (cold) 10. Which is way from here to London? (good) II. Complete the sentences with the correct form of comparatives or superlatives of the adjectives.

1. The Great Wall of China is the world's (long) 2. Ho Chi Minh City is the (big) 3. 4. 5. 6.

structure. city in Viet Nam.

The River the (long) river in the world. BurjNile Khalifa in is Dubai is the world's (tall) building. Fansipan is the (high) mountain in Viet Nam. Russia is the (big) country in the world.

7. China has the (big)

population in the world.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 55

 

 

8. Petronas Twin Towers in Kuala Lumpur is (tall) 9. Mexico City is (big) than Tokyo. 10. The Mekong River is (long) than the Red River.

than Sears Tower in Chicago.

III. Complete the text about the London Underground. Use must  or  or mustn't .

When you travel on the London Underground, you (1) smoke. You (2) always buy a ticket and if you have a travel card, you (3) use it on the same day. When a train arrives at the station, you (3) stand back. You (5) be polite to the staff. IV. Write the sentences senten ces to show what you must do in these situations, using the words given in the brackets.

 Example: I've got an awful headache. (take/ aspirin)  I must take an aspirin.

l. My hair is too long. (go/ barber's)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. The kitchen is in a mess. (tidy it up)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. I've got an awful toothache. (go/ dentist's)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. I eat eat too many sweets. sweets. (stop (stop eating) eating)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. I've got a pile of dirty dirty clothes. (wash them)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. I'm getting too fat. (lose weight)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. My chair is broken. (buy a new one)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. My bicycle is very dirty. dirty. (wash it)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. I've got a terrible terrible cold and a cough. (go/ doctor's)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. I've written three important letters. (go/ post office)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ C. SPEAKING I. Rearrange the sentences to make a conversation.

 Mum

And you mustn't eat too much. Or you feel sick.

 Rory  Mum

OK. I'll be careful. Is there anything I can do? Wait, Rory. You must be home by midnight

 Rory

I know, Mum. I never eat too much.

 Rory

Oh, is that an order?



 Mum

 Rory

 Mum  Rory

You can have fun! OK, Mum. I'm off to the party. That's not true. After your last party, you felt very sick! I know, Mum. Midnight is usual.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 56

 

 

II. Match the questions 1-6 to the answers a-f, writing the answer in each blank.  ______ 1. Oh, what is special about it? a) We can see the whole

 ______ 2. What is your favourite place in Sa Pa?  ______ 3. Where do you want to spend your summer holiday?  ______ 4. It sounds good. What can you see from there?  ______ 5. What's it like?  ______ 6. Really? Where is it?

town below in the

white clouds and mist.  b) It's next to the town of Sa Pa, and it belongs to the Hoang Lien Son Range in Sapa District. c) It looks like a jaw of a dragon opening wide to the sky. It is a beautiful scenery when the whole landscape is in the mist. d) I want to go to Sa Pa. e) It's Ham Rong Mountain. f) It's the most wonderful destination for tourists in Sa Pa.

 Put the questions and answers above in order to make a complete conversation, con versation, and then practise it with your classmate. III. Look at the information about the three national parks in Viet Nam. Use the facts fa cts in the table ta ble to which national park is la larr ger, hi high ghe er , hotte hotter , the larg large est, the hi highest ghest,, or the hottest . Area

Height above the sea level

Average annual temperature

Cuc Phuong National Park

22,000 hectares

300 to 600 metres

24.70C

Cat Ba National Park Cat Tien National Park

16,200 hectares 71,200 hectares

150m 100m

23.600C 25.2 C

 Example:

Cuc Phuong National Park is larger than Cat Ba National Park. Can Tien National Park is larger than Cuc Phuong National Park. Cat Tien National Park is the largest.  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ D. READING I. Tom is on holiday in France, and Daisy in Prague. Their postcards are cut in small small pieces. Put the four parts of each postcard: 1-4 for Tom's postcard, and A-D for Daisy's. 1

Hi Mark. I'm having a great time in France with my penfriend Simon and   A

Hello Lucy. I'm staying in the centre of Prague with my m y cousin Sofia. It's a   

day! Simon's friends are very friendly but I don't always understand und erstand them. By for now.

Tom  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 57

 

 

 

very beautiful city. I'm taking lots of photos and buying b uying lots of souvenirs. We're   

raining. In the evenings, we go to discos. Prague's fantastic! See you soon. Daisy   

sea. It's always sunny and I surf every    

ear the  his family. His sister Pauline is really nice. We're staying in a house nnear  

sitting in a lovely cafe now. We can't go out because it's  II. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the th e word following letter.

Dear Mary, I'm very glad to know that you are going to visit Ha Noi this summer. Would you like me to tell you something (1) Ha Noi before you go? Well, Ha Noi is a cultural and political center of Viet Nam. In Ha Noi, you can find ancient houses and modern buildings. Ha Noi is a large city now, and there are many places worth (2) . You can visit Ho Chi Minh’s Mausoleum, One-Pillar Pagoda, Kiem Lake and West Lake. Besides, you can enjoy the Vietnamese food, (3) , grilled fish, spring rolls, steamed rolls and "pho" - a special dish of Viet Nam. However, I would like to recommend that you (4) visit Ha Long Bay and Sa Pa because these places attract a lot of visitors due to their magnificent caves, beautiful limestone islands and natural landscapes in Ha Long Bay and their tribal villages, nice mountain slopes and jungles streams in Sa Pa. I am looking forward to seeing you in Ha Noi and I hope you (5) have a nice holiday in Viet Nam.  Love  Lan 1.  A. about 2.  A. seeing 3.  A. as 4.  A. can 5.  A. have to

B. of B. see B. of B. should B. may

C. at C. seen C. such as C. would C. will

D. in D. saw D. such D. may D. must

III. Read Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

Ba Be Lake is the largest lake in Viet Nam. It is a mountainous area, nearly 250 km from Ha Noi. When you get to the entrance of Ba Be National Park, you have another 16 kilometre drive through the park to arrive at the small village "Pac  Ngoi" of Tay Minority You can stay overnight in a local stilt house. The next day you can get on your boat and have a trip on Ba Be Lake. You can enjoy the wonder landscape. During the boat trip can visit some caves and the Dau Dang Waterfall. You can also watch the local communities with their daily life. 1. What is Ba Be Lake?

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 58

 

 

2. 3. 4. 5.

 __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ Where is it?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ How can we visit the small village "Pac Ngo" of Tay Minority?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ What can we visit during the boat trip on Ba Be Be Lake?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ What can we watch the the local communities?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text.

Tra Co Beach in Quang Ninh province is 9 kilometers from Mong Cai. It has the (1)   and the most romantic beach in Viet Nam. Tourists can enjoy the (2) of white sand beaches and green sea water all year (3) . Visitors can (4) enjoy the sunset or sunrise in Con Mang islet. You can visit Tra Co Communal House, Linh Khanh Pagoda, and Tra Co Church. If tourists want some fresh (5) , they can find it from fishing boats. They can take part in "Tra Co Festival" from May 30 to June 6. 1.  A. long B. longer C. longest D. much longer 2.  A. beauty B. beautiful C. of beauty D. pretty 3.  A. over B. long C. round D. longer 4. 5.   A. A. be  seafood

B. be able B. menu

C. then C. air

D. also D. water

V. Read the passage, and decide whether the sentences are true (T) or false (F).

Ayers Rock or Uluru is 860 metres above the sea level. You have to walk 9.4 kilometres around the base of Uluru. In 1958 it was declared the national park. You are mostly to see many kinds of birds and reptiles and more than 400 types of plants in the national parks. There is evidence to show that the Aboriginal people have lived in Central Australia for at 30,000 years. Uluru's rock art was 5,000 years old. In 1873, William Gosse  became the first European to see Uluru, naming it after Sir Henry Ayers, the Chief Secretary of South Australia. Each year more than 250,000 people visit the park from all over the world. True/ False  1. Ayers Rock is 860 metres under the sea water. __________ 2. Ayers Rock became a national park in 1958. __________ 3. There are not many types of birds and reptiles in the national park. __________ 4. The Aboriginal people have lived there for a very long period of time. __________ 5. Every year over a quarter of million visitors come to the national park from all over __________ the world. VI. SOUTH AMERICA

 A. The So Sout uth h Am Ame er ica Quiz Quiz.. Se Sea arch the I nt nte erne rnett to ha havve the co corr re rect ct ans nsw wer s. 1. How many people live live in in South America? A. about 400 million B. about 200 million million   C. about 100 million  million  D. about 50 million  million  2. What are are the two main languages in South America? French   Portugues   A. Spanish and French B. Spanish and Portugues C. French and Portuguese  Portuguese  3. Which is the biggest country? Venezuela   B. Ecuador   A. Venezuela 4. Which country is not in South America? America?

D. English and Spanish Spanish  

Chile  C. Chile 

Brazil   D. Brazil

A. Uruguay

B. Viet Nam

C. Colombia

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

D. Peru  Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 59

 

 

B . R ead the te texts xts about about geogr ograp aphi hica call fe f eat atur ure es of Sout South h Am A mer i ca ca,, and give gi ve the co corr r ect answe answerr . River  The Amazon is a very big river. It is more than 6,400 kilometers long. It flows through Peru, Colombia, Ecuador, and Brazil. There is more water in this river than any other river in the world. world . Lake  Lake Titicaca is on the border between Bolivia and Peru. It is 3,810 metres above sea level. It is also a deep lake, in places about 180 metres deep. This lake is almost a small sea. It is more than 190 kilometres long and about 80 kilometres wide. There are also 41 islands in the lake. Waterfall

The Angel Falls in Venezuela is nearly 1,000 metres high. In very hot weather the water can evaporate  before it reaches the bottom. Desert

The Atacama Desert in Chile is about 1,000 kilometres long. It is also 15 million years old. It is very dry: on average there is l mm of rain per year. Rainforest  The Amazon Rainforest covers a billion acres including the countries Brazil, Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador and Peru. It produces about 20% of the planet's oxygen. More than 50% of the world's species of plants, insects and animals live in the Amazon rainforest. 1. How long is the Amazon?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What countries does it flow through?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Is it the the biggest river in in the world?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Where is Lake Titicaca?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. How long is it? How wide is it?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. How many islands are there there in the lake?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. How high high is the Angel Falls in Venezuela?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. Where is the Atacama Desert?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. How long is the Atacama Desert?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. How old is the desert?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 11. What countries does the Amazon Rainforest cover?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 12. How many species of plants, insects and animals live in the Amazon rainforest?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VII. Read the text and then complete the fact file about Brazil. FACT FILE

Brazil is the largest country in South America. Its capital is Brasilia. About 183 million people live in Brazil and the official language is Portuguese. Some important exports of Brazil are oranges and coffee. The important

geographical features of Brazil are the Amazon River, and the Amazon Rainforest. One major problem in Brazil  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 60

 

 

is the destruction of the rainforest. Many animals and plants are disappearing as a result. Many tribes that lived in the rainforest don't exist any more.  Name: .................................................... ........................................................................................................ .................................................... Capital: ....................................................................................................... Population: ................................................................................................. Official language: ...................................................................................... Exports: ...................................................................................................... Major geographical features: ..................................................................... Problems:.................................................................................................... VIII. American National Parks: Read the texts and answer the questions.

 A. The Col Colo orad rado o R ockie ckies. s. The Rocky Mountains were the home of the Apache, Blackfoot and Sioux Indians. They stretch from Alaska to New Rockies. The Rockies are high! The Colorado Rockies are the tallest. People call them "the roof of America" because the tops of the mountain here are 4,401 m. The Colorado Rockies are a popular area to go mountain climbing, fishing, hunting and skiing. B . Y ellow llowsto stone ne N ationa tionall Pa P ar k. This is in Wyoming and is older than the other national natio nal parks in America. It is famous for its hot ho t springs and for its grizzly bears. Some of the bears are very big. They are 700 kg.  Answe  Answ er the the que uest stii ons ns.. 1. Who lived in the Rocky Mountains?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Why do we call the Rockies "the roof roof of America"?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. How high are the the tallest mountains in the Rockies?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. What is Yellowstone famous for?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Is Yellowstone National Park the oldest national park in America?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ E. WRITING I. Write full sentences, using the suggested words and phrases given.

l. Mexico City/ big/ city/ world.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. My brother's room/ big/ my room.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. London/ small/ Tokyo.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Hung/ short/ Ba.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Fansipan/ high mountain/ Viet Nam.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. Nam/ tall/ boy/ his class.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 61

 

 

7 Thoa/ beautiful/ girl/ village.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. The pagoda/ tall/ the temple.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 62

 

 

TEST (UNIT 5) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1.  A. red B. tent C. end 2.  A. lake B. bag C. take 3.  A. island B. plaster C. cost 4.  A. map B. area C. hat

D. forest D. nature D. longest D. plan

5.  A. post

D. coast

B. cost C. question II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6.  A. forest B. mountain C. lake 7.  A. walk B. compass C. plaster 8.  A. waterfall B. beach C. lake 9.  A. hottest B. biggest C. largest 10. A. mountain B. valley C. cave

D. city D. sleeping bag D. desert D. smaller D. club

III. Choose the correct answers.

11. Tra Co beach  beach is beach in Viet Nam Nam.. long  longest   longest   A. long  B. longer   C. longest D. the longest the world. world. 12. Mount Everest is the highest mountain  mountain   A. in B. on C. at D. of things around us us.. 13. The islands in Ha Long Bay are named  named  A. in B. after C. with D. at remember to bring an umbrella umbrella.. 14. It is often rainy in Hue,  Hue,  A. but B. or C. so D. must 15. Which city is is   : Ha Noi or Ho Chi Minh City? City?   A. large B. larger C. largest D. the largest  "Yes. All my things are in my m y  "  16. "Do you finish packing"? –  "Yes. A. back B. backpack C. back pack D. plaster 17. Ha Long Bay is Vietnam's  Vietnam's  wonder . B. most natural beautiful beautiful   A. most beautiful natural  natural  D. the most natural beautiful C. the most beautiful natural  beautiful   natural  18. The Amazon  Amazon  . A. Rainforest B. Rainy Forest  Forest  C. Wet Forest Forest   D. Wetter Forest 19. is a large thick bag for sleeping in, especially when you are camping. camping. B. A sleep bag bag   C. A sleepy bag bag   D. A bag for sleeping sleeping   A. A sleeping bag  bag  20. If we had a  a  , we wouldn't get los los.. compass   painkiller   C. compass D.  painkiller  A. backpack B. ruler   21. You travel alone to the mountain. Always go in a group group.. C. do D. don  don't't   A. must B. mustn  mustn't't   22. People think Ayers Rock is  is  in the evening when it is red. red . A. good B. better C. best D. the best 23. You take a lot of warm clothes when you go to Sa Pa in winter . A. must B. mustn  mustn't't   C. can D. can  can't't   24. Ba Be Lake is the largest  largest   lake in Viet Nam Nam..

fresh   A. fresh

B. freshwater  

C. water  

mount  D. mount 

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 63

 

 

25. The Imperial City in Hue is the greatest greatest   . attractions  attraction   tourist   attraction  B. tourist attractions  C. tour attraction D. attraction tourist A. tourist attraction  26. Ha Long Bay is the number one one   in Viet Nam. Nam. B. natural wonder   C. wonderful nature nature   D. wonder nature  nature  A. nature wonder   27. You regulations.  be late for school. It's against the school regulations. can   can't  mustn't  C. can D. can't  A. must B. mustn't  28. You all necessary things along with you before you start your trip. trip. A. takes  takes  B. won't take  take  C. must take  take  D. mustn't take  take  was   experience of my life life.. 29. The boat trip to Ca Mau, the southern tip of Viet Nam, was  good  better    best  best  A. good  B.  better  C. best  D. the best  - it's very useful when you go into a cave because it's very dark 30. You must remember to bring aa   there..  there scissors   torch  compass   A. scissors B. torch  C. clock   D. compass IV. Complete each of the following sentences with ONE suitable word.

31. The Sahara is the world's desert in the world. 32. Mount Everest is the mountain in the world. 33. The Imperial City is the greatest tourist in Hue. 34. The travel will give tourists some advice about the trip to Nha Trang. 35. Look at the , and you can choose where to go for your holiday and a lot of information about the place. V. Match a travel item in column A with its meaning in column B, and write the answer in each blank. Answer

A

B

36. compass

a) a large thick bag for sleeping in, especially when you are camping.

37. backpack

b) medicine used to reduce or remove physical pain.

38. sleeping bag

c) a device for finding direction, with a needle always pointing north

39. painkiller

d) a device used for cutting materials such as paper, cloth or hair

40. scissors

e) a large bag used to carry things on your back

VI. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B, and write the answer in each blank. Answer

A

B

41. What things can you do in Hue?

a) It's Fansipan.

42. What is the highest mountain in Viet Nam? b) Travelling Travelling by bus is the best way. 43. What is the other name for Ayers Rock?

c) In Ninh Binh Province, about 130 km southwest of Ha Noi.

44. Where is Cuc Phuong National Park?

d) We can visit many museums, art galleries, and temples.

45. What is the best way of travelling in a city? e) Uluru. Local people call it Uluru. VII. Complete the conversation with the phrases below.

get the things

must bring it back

your motorbike

must go

mustn't pick up 

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 64

 

 

Mandy  Tom  Mandy  Tom Mandy  Tom Mandy  Tom Mandy Tom Mandy  Tom

Can I borrow (46) ? My motorbike? What for? I have to get something from the shop for Mum. OK, all right. But you (47) by five. And you must park it behind the house. And you (48) faster than 20. And you mustn't let anyone else ride on it. Anything else? Yeah. You (49) any of your friends. And you mustn't take it dirty. Is that all? Well, let me think. You know what, Tom What? Here's the shopping list. Go and (50) motorbike . Hey, wait … 

for Mum. And take good care of your

VIII. Complete the following passage, using the words in the box.

study waves

landscapes beach

familiar considered

water moving

seen clouds  

Mui Ne is located 24 km north-east of the city of Phan Thiet. It is a fishing village as well as a (51) tourism area in Binh Province. It is found on Highway N0. 706,and andsloped, is famous for sweeping sandisdunes and beautiful rows of Thuan palm trees. The (52) is shallow the (53) clean and blue and the sun rarely hides behind (54) . Besides beaches and sand dunes, there are also beautiful (55) such as Suoi Tien (Fair Spring), the Ong Hoang Building, and the Poshanu Cham Tower. It has long been (56) the "Hawaii" of Viet Nam. It has (57) roads under coconut trees, a beautiful beach and cliffs. The typical scenery of this place lies in the (58) lines of golden sand, and when they are (59) from distance, they look like moving (60) . IX. Read the passage, and answer the questions.

The Amazon River in South Sou th America is an amazing and important river for the planet. The Amazon River carries more water than any other river in the world. In fact, the Amazon River is responsible for twenty percent of fresh water that flows into the world's oceans. The Amazon River is the second longest river in the world (the Nile River in Africa is the longest), and about 6,400 6,4 00 km long. The Amazon River has the largest area of land that flows into the river, and more tributaries than any other river in the world - more than 200 tributaries. 61. How many percentage of fresh water flowing into the world's oceans is the Amazon Amaz on River responsible for?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 62. Does the Amazon River carry more water than any other river in the world?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 63. How long is the Amazon River?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 64. What is the longest river in the world?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 65. How many tributaries does it have?

 __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 65

 

 

X. Use the following sets of words and phrases to write complete sentences.

66. Phu Quoc Island/ large/ island/ Viet Nam.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 67. Cuc Phuong National Park/ old/ national park/ Viet Nam.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 68. Cat Tien National Park/ large/ national park/ pa rk/ Viet Nam.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 69. Landmark 72 in Ha Noi/ high/ building/ Viet Nam.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 70. Asia/ big/ continent/ world.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XI. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.

71. Ho Chi Minh City with the population po pulation of over 8 million is bigger than any other cities in Viet Nam. Ho Chi Minh City is the ___________________________________________________________________. 72. Angel Falls is over 1,000 feet higher than any other falls in the world. Angel Falls is ___________________________________________________________________________. 73. Lake Superior in North America is a freshwater lake; it is larger than any other freshwater lakes in the world. Lake Superior in North America is __________________________ _____________________________________________________ ________________________________. _____. 74. Remember to bring the compass: compa ss: if not we will get lost in the forest. You must ____________________________ _______________________________________________________ __________________________________________________. _______________________. 75. Take a waterproof coat during d uring your trip to Fansipan Mountain because be cause it is rainy there. You ___________________________________________________________________________________. 76. It is very important that you arrive on time at school.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________. __________. 77. It is very dangerous to walk alone after 10 pm in that park. You ___________________________________________________________________________________. 78. Taking a boat trip around the islands in Ha Long Bay is the most important thing of the trip. You ___________________________________________________________________________________. 79. Antarctica is colder than any other place in the world. Antarctica is ____________________________________________________________________________. 80. It is wrong of us to write on the walls or tables in our classroom. We ___________________________________________________________________________________.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 66

 

 

Unit 6:

OUR TET HOLIDAY

A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part.

communication

pronunciation

comparison

sound

tradition

should

house

best

 person school

show class

blossom wish

swim shopping

special

smile

she

sugar

 sure

shy

English

nation

rooster

shrimp

success

dish

appearance

patient

rubbish

international

ʃ / /  ʃ 

/s/

……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………. ………………………………………………   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………   ……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….   II. 1.  2.  3.  4.  5. 

Find the word which A. special A. cheer A. tradition A. blossom A. rice

has a different sound in the part underlined. B. spring C. she B. child C. peach B. condition C. celebration B. discussion C. rooster B. celebrate C. calendar

D. sugar D. chorus D. question D. compass D. smile

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Put the words from the box in the appropriate rows of verbs.

a pagoda

special food

peach blossoms

the house

decorations

old teachers

front door

a church

pine tree

flowers

relatives

the LED lights

apricot blossoms friends

a calendar

home village

the living room

traditional food

a temple

flower market

go to

_______________________________________________________ ____________________________ __________________________________________________ _______________________

decorate

______________________________________________________________________________

hang

______________________________________________________________________________

buy

______________________________________________________________________________

visit

______________________________________________________________________________

cook

______________________________________________________________________________

II. Answer the questions.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 67

 

 

1. Lan's Vietnamese. Where is she from?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Alan's Australian. Where is he from?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Nancy is from Canada. What's her nationality?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Yoko comes from Japan. What's her nationality?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Laura and her friends come from the USA. What is their nationality?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. He's from Hong Kong. What's his nationality? nationality?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. He's Brian. Brian. He's from Australia. What's What's his nationality?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. His name's John. He's from Scotland. What's his nationality? nationality?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. Mr. and Mrs. Brown are from Toronto, Canada. What language do they they speak?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. But Michel is from Quebec, Canada. What language does he speak?  ________________________ _____________________________________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  sho oul uld  d " or " sh  sho ould uldn' n't  t '. III. Fill in each blank with " sh '. 1. The students make so much noise. 2. The film is interesting. You go and see it. 3. Tom drive carefully. The traffic is very heavy. 4. You smoke so much. 5. You give up smoking. 6. You spend more time on your homework. 7. The English girl wants to live in Viet Nam. She learn Vietnamese. 8. He drink so much coffee before bedtime. 9. Tom has a bad toothache. He go to the dentist's. 10. You go to bed so late every night.  sho ould  or sh  sho ould uldn't  n't . IV. Complete the sentences with sh

l. A: I don't feel very well. B: You go to bed early. 2. A: We're bored. B: You watch so much TV. 3. A: There's a new girl at school called Susanna. B: You invite her to our class. 4. A: don't understand my Maths homework. B: You ask your teacher to explain it again. 5. A: I can't fall asleep at night. B: You drink so much coffee. 6. A: I don't have any money. B: You buy so many DVDs.

7. A: I'm I'm going to live in France for a year.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 68

 

 

B: You learn some French. 8. A: I got a bad mark in my Science test. B: You study more. V. Write pieces of advice for these situations, using sh  sho ould  or sh  sho oul uld dn' n't  t  and  and the words given in brackets.  Example: I feel awfully tired.  sho ould go to bed early. You sh

l. My tooth is aching again. (not eat so many sweet things)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. I have to get up very early tomorrow. (set the alarm clock)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. I am putting on weight. (do more exercise)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. I don't feel well. (stay at home)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. I think I'm short-sighted. (go to the doctor's)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. I have a pain in my chest. (see a doctor)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. I lent a friend my English book, but he hasn't given it back. (ask him for it)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. I have some difficult difficult questions. (work in a group)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ C. SPEAKING I. Match the sentences to make conversations, writing the answer in each blank. Then practise them. Answer A B

 ______  ______  ______  ______

1. I'm tired. 2. I have a headache. 3. My teacher's angry with me. 4. My cat's ill.

 ______ 5. It's raining outside.  ______ 6. There's lots of food during the Tet holiday.

a. You shouldn't talk in class. b. You should take it to the vet. e. You should take an umbrella. d. You shouldn't eat so much. e. You shouldn't go to bed so late. f. You should take an aspirin.

II. Arrange the sentences in the correct order to make a conversation between Mai and Michiko. Mai asks Michiko about how people in Japan celebrate the New Year. Write the answer in each blank, then practise the conversation.

1. It's on January 1st. ItIt lasts three days through January 3rd. 2. They watch television and then television will broadcast 108 bells. As soon as the 108 th bell is rung, people all say "Happy New Year ". 3. What do they usually do next? 4. Yes, they usually decorate their houses with some pine trees on both sides of he door. People also exchange cards and presents. 5. 6. 7. 8.

What do people do to celebrate celebrate the New Year? They clean and decorate their houses a few days before the New Year. Year. Could you tell tell me something about Japanese Year? When is the New Year? Some families put on special kimonos to go to visit pagodas. Then they come home and eat the special New

Year's Day's food and drink a lot of rice wine.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 69

 

 

9. Do they decorate the houses with trees and flowers? 10. I see. And what do they usually do on the New Year's Eve? III. Talk to your classmates which things you will do or won't do this New Year.

1. Visit your grandparents. 2. Visit your relatives. 3. Go out on New Year's Eve to watch fireworks. 4. Go shopping with your mother. 5. Buy fireworks. 6. Buy red envelopes for lucky money. 7. Go to the the department stores with with your mother to buy new clothes. 8. Help your your mother to cook traditional traditional food. food. 9. Welcome the Tet holiday with your your parents at home. 10. Keep your lucky money in the piggy bank. 11. Plant some young trees. 12. Help your mother to clear the table after the meal. 13. Help your parents cook banh chung.  14. Help your father repaint the house. h ouse. 15. Eat banh chung  on  on the Lunar New Year's Day. 16. Kill a rooster, and take some red feathers from the rooster and stick them to the drawings of the sum in your house. 17. Throw water over other people. 18. Wait for the first footer. 19. Wish your family members good health and good luck. D. READING I. Read the passage and then decide whether the sentences a True or False.

l. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Viet Nam's New Year is known as Tet. It begins between January twentyfirst and nineteenth. The exact date changes from year to year. Tet lasts ten days. The first three days are the most important. Vietnamese people believe that what  people do during those days will influence the whole w hole year. As a result, they make every effort to avoid arguments and smile as much as possible. Vietnamese people  believe that the first person through the door on New Year's Y ear's Day Da y can c an bring either good or bad luck. Children receive lucky money as they do in other countries. Tet occurs in late January or early February. ____________ There are two weeks for Lunar New Year. ____________ People should not argue with each other at Tet. ____________ The first visitor on New Year's Day brings good or bad luck. ____________ Only children in Viet Nam get lucky money. ____________

II. Read the passage, and answer the questions.

It's Christmas Day now. Mr. and Mrs. Brown are buying some presents for the family and their friends. They have got a new TV set and some records for dancing. Mr. and Mrs. Green live in Scotland and they are staying the Browns in London at Christmas. Mr. Green is decorating the Christmas tree in the sitting-room. Mrs. Green is putting some Christmas and colourful lights on it. All people are very happy. 1. What are Mr. and Mrs. Brown doing?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

2. Where are Mr. and Mrs. Green staying?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 70

 

 

3. What is Mr. Green doing?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. What is Mrs. Green doing?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ III. Read the following passage, and decide the statements below are True (T) or False (F).

On Christmas Eve, everything is hurried and busy. Offices and public buildings close at one o'clock, but the shops stay open later. Most big cites, especially London, are decorated with colored lights across the streets and enormous Christmas trees. The trains, and buses are crowded with people traveling from all parts of the country to be at home for Christmas. In the homes, there is a great air of expectation. The children are also decorating the house with colored lights. Christmas cards - with the words "Merry Christmas to You" or "Wishing You a Merry Christmas and Prosperous New Year", or "With the Compliments of the Season", etc. - are arranged on shelves, tables, and sometimes hung around the walls. Meanwhile, the housewife is probably busy in the kitchen getting things ready for the next day's dinner. The Christmas turkey is being prepared, the pudding is inspected and the cake is got out of its tin. In small towns and villages, one may still see carol-singers who come and stand in front of the house and sing or play Christmas carols. They collect money in a Christmas box. The money collected is to help old  people. l. The shops close at one o'clock on Christmas Eve. ____________ 2. Colored lights are decorated across streets in big cities. ____________ 3. People expect to be at home on Christmas Eve. ____________ 4. Trains and buses are almost empty on Christmas Eve. ____________ 5. Colored lights are also decorated at homes. ____________ 6. Christmas cards only have wishes for Christmas. ____________ 7. Turkey and pudding are traditional food at Christmas. ____________ 8. We can see carol-singers in the countryside. ____________ 9. The carol-singers collect money for themselves. ____________ 10. The money collected is used for a good purpose. IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text.

It is a custom for all (1) of a Chinese family to be present at home on the Eve of Chinese New Year for the family gathering. This custom is meant to show the unity of the family for the (2) new year. On the (3) five days of the Chinese New Year, no one in the family is allowed to sweep the floor. The Chinese believe that sweeping the floor (4) drive away all good (5) that the New Year can bring. 1. A. people B. members C. friends D. characters 2. A. to come B. come C. comes D. coming 3. A. one B. first C. next D. all 4. A. should B. must C. will D. mustn't 5. A. luck B. money C. news D. time V. Fill in each blank of the passage with the words in the box.

dark

candy

like

prize

when

 put

strange

next

one

parties

In Canada and the United States, (1) Halloween is on October 31st. It is a day (2)

of the most popular days in the year is Halloween. some people dress up in (3) or

an animal, a person from a book or a unusual costumes. For example, they may dress up to look (4) movie or a famous person from history. In some places, children go to school in their Halloween costumes.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 71

 

 

After (5) many young children (6) on their costumes and visit their neighbors. They knock on the door and shout "Trick or Treat!" Then the neighbors give them some (7) , and the children go on to the (8) house. Adults also enjoy dressing up for Halloween. There are usually Halloween (9) in the evening and usually there is a (10) for the best or most unusual costumes. E. WRITING Write two paragraphs about how people in Viet Nam and in Japan celebrate the New Year, using the information from the table. Aspects  Preparations

The Vietnamese

- clean the house - decorate the house with peach blossoms and apricot blossoms - cook special foods  Activities on - meet together and wait for the New Year to  New Year's Eve come - exchange good wishes - give lucky money to children - go to the pagoda  Foods and - eat banh chung  or  or banh tet   clothes - put on best clothes or traditional clothes  People to - among family members

The Japanese

- clean the house - decorate the house with pine trees - cook special foods - watch TV and listen to the bell ringing - visit the pagoda

- eat special foods and drink rice wine - wear kimonos or special dress - among family members

celebrate with

 ___________________________ _____________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 72

 

 

TEST (UNIT 6) I. Find the word which has a different sound in 1.  A. decorate B. market 2.  A. smile B. so 3.  A. travel B. parent 4.  A. love B. pagoda

5.  A. lucky

thee part underlined. th C. resolution C. spring C. hand C. mother

B. shy C. why II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6.  A. blossom B. apricot C. shopping 7.  A. decorate B. envelope C. repaint 8.  A. visit B. repaint C. wish 9.  A. Korea B. Japanese C. Scottish 10. A. rooster B. writer C. gamer

D. celebrate D. noise D. bad D. come D. buy D. flower D. decorations D. house D. Dutch D. swimmer

III. Choose the correct answers.

11. Do you believe that the first footer   us good or bad luck? luck?   take  bring  make   bring  A. must take  B. should bring  C. can make D. can bring  12. Students  Students  copy their classmates' work . A. should  should  B. shouldn't  shouldn't  C. must must   D. not  not  water over one another . 13. People in Laos  Laos  give  throw   take   bring  A. give  B. throw C. take D.  bring  a midnight kiss with someone they love. love .  14. The American  American  share   take   brings  celebrate   A. share B. take  C. brings  D. celebrate 15. People in many countries in the world often wear their   clothes on the New Year Day Day..  A. tradition tradition   B. traditional traditional   C. ordinary  ordinary  D. summer   to their parents or elders and wish them a long and 16. On New Year's Day, children in Korea make a healthy . A.  bow bow - live  live  B. friend - lives  lives  C.  bows bows - lives lives   D. bow  bow - life  life  life and health.. health 17. I wish you aa   A. long - best  B. big C. long - good  D. happy - bad  best   big - good  good  good  bad  the table after the meal. meal. 18. We should help our mothers  mothers  A. make  make  B. to make make   C. clear   D. to clearing clearing   19. I will my lucky money in my piggy bank . A. keep B. spend C. borrow D. give 20. At Tet, many people present rice to wish  wish  enough food throughout the year . A. in B. at C. for D. with 21. We shouldn't play music  music  after midnight midnight.. A. careful B. right C. loud D. easy  New Year's Day Day.. 22. Some Vietnamese people don't eat shrimps  shrimps  A. in B. on C. at D. during 23. The Times Square Ball begins its fall  fall   millions of voices countdown the final seconds ooff the year . A. when B. during C. throughout D. because 24. Children should help their parents  parents  their house flowers and pictures pictures..

with   A. repaint - with

beautiful   C. decorate - in B. make - more beautiful 

with  D. decorate - with 

25. New Year's Eve is a night when members of a family often get  25. New get 

.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 73

 

 

A. together

B. another

C. other

D. others

America   New Year . 26. January 1st is a day when people in Europe and America  A. see B. remember   C. celebrate D. spend lucky money red envelope envelope.. 27. On New Year's Day, children  children   A. get - in B. ask - on C. take - at D. have - with  with  midnight on New Year's Eve. Eve . 28. In London people cheer and sing when the clock   A. gets B. strikes C. see D. goes 29. People believe that  that  water over people will . a lot of rain in the New Year . A. throw - bring  bring 

B. throwing - bring  bring 

C. to throw - bringing bringing  

30. On New Year's Day, many people put on their best clothes and go to to    pagodas - relatives  relatives  C.  pagoda pagoda - relative relative   friends  B. pagodas A. houses - friends 

D. throwing - bringing  bringing 

or visit their .  friend D. the main room –  friend

IV. Complete each of the following sentences with ONE suitable word.

31. You knock the door before you enter the office. 32. You eat a lot of fast food because it is not good for your health. 33. In Viet Nam people shouldn't break things at Tet they believe it will bring bad luck for the rest of the year. 34. Temples in Japan their bells 108 times to celebrate the New Year. 35. It is a in America to exchange a midnight kiss with someone they love. 36. Tet is really a time of and festivals throughout the country. 37. Nowadays, the Tet holiday is shorter, but people enjoy the festival very much. V. Match a word or phrase in column A with its meaning in column B. Answer

A

38. 39. 40. 44. 42.

eve   eve decorate decorate   gathering gathering   piggy bank   piggy bank  celebrate   celebrate

B

a.  b. c. d. e.

a small box often in a shape of a pig that children use for saving money in.  in.   to do something special or enjoyable on an important day.  day.  event.  the day or evening before an important event.  a time when people come together   to add something in order to make a thing more beautiful to look at. at.  

VI. Choose the questions in column A with the answers in column B. Answer

A

43. When will we visit the pagoda?  pagoda?   44. Will we buy ‘banh chung’ for Tet?   45. Will you spend all your lucky money  money   What will you do to help your parents 46. What 46.  before Tet?  Tet?  47. What shouldn't we do during Tet?  Tet?  

B

a. Well, I keep it in my pigg piggyy bank.  bank.   b. We shouldn't play games all day.  day.   c.  No, we will cook them ourselves. ourselves.   d. On the first day of Tet house.   e. I help my father to repaint and decorate our house.

VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following test.

There are many Chinese festivals in Hong Kong. The Western New Year starts on the first day of January  but the Chinese begin New Year on the first day of the first moon of the Chinese calendar. Before New Year's Day comes, people clean and decorate their houses, (48) a lot of traditional food and go shopping for  presents and new clothes. New Year's Eve is the time (49) every family gathers its members together for dinner. People (50) the New Year with a music performance and a firework display to light up the sky.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 74

 

 

On New Year's Day, they visit their friends and relatives. The children get lucky money in red envelopes. Many people go to the (51) to wish for good health and good luck. Chinese people in Hong Kong celebrate the New Year with (52) and happiness. 48. A. take B. bring C. cook D. sell 49. A. when B. after C. before D. during 50. A. meet B. see C. end D. celebrate 51. A. houses B. pagodas C. family D. camps 52. A. hopeful B. hopeless C. hope D. hoping VIII. Read the text, and then choose the correct answers.  

The most important celebration holiday in China is the Lunar New Year. At this time, shops are closed. People celebrate by having parties, by paying friendly phone calls to their neighbours, and by visiting the temples or pagodas to promises for the New Year. Children walk through the streets, carrying colourful lanterns and paper figures. Fireworks are also set off to light up the sky. The time of the New Year is also the time at which which Chinese people decorate their homes. For example, the windows, which are made of thick paper are torn down, and new ones are put up. This is also the time during during which people pay their debts. Everyone tries to settle all his bills before the beginning of the New Year. Before  New Year's Yea r's Eve, people make their homes attractive by b y decorating them with flowers and plants, and hanging  brightly-coloured decorations. 53. This passage as a whole is about . A. paying debts B. China C. the Chinese New Year D. New Year's promises 54. The Lunar New Year is . A. an important Chinese holiday B. the time for having large meals C. a special time for children D. the time when no one is in debt 55. What can we infer from the passage? A. The Chinese have only one holiday. B. The Chinese New Year is happy. happ y. C. The Chinese New Year celebration cel ebration lasts seven days. D. People don't go to church during the Chinese New Year. 56. Which of these sentences is NOT true? A. Fireworks are set off to light up the sky. B. Chinese houses are made of paper. C. Chinese people pay debts d ebts at New Year's. D. People also decorate the windows.

57. How can people make their homes attractive? A. By decorating them with flowers and plants. p lants. B. By decorating them with brightly-coloured decorations. ho mes. C. By hanging brightly-coloured decorations outside their homes. p lants, and hanging brightly-coloured decorations. D. By decorating them with flowers and plants, IX. Rearrange the sentences sentenc es in the correct correc t order to make a conversation between betw een Lan and her English friend, Daisy, about Tet in VietNam. Write the answer in each blank.

58. _________ 59. _________ 60. _________ 61. _________ 62. _________

a. What do you usually do at Tet? b. Oh, that sounds really interesting. c. Well, it's on January 27th this year. d. What is Tet? e. Well, we cook a lot of traditional traditional food, food, visit our relatives relatives and friends, and we also go to

63. _________

 pagodas. f. When is it exactly?

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 75

 

 

64. _________ 65. _________

g. Do you know that the Tet holiday is next week? h. It's the time when Vietnamese people celebrate the beginning of spring.

X. Give advice with “should” or “shouldn’t”, using the words given in brackets.   Example: You look very pale and terrible. (see a doctor)

You should see a doctor. 66. You work until 11 every night. (not work so hard)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 67. It's Mai's birthday on Saturday. I think we should do something. (buy her a nice birthday present)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 68. The car did not start this morning. (take it to the garage)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 69. Our train leaves at 6 o’clock tomorrow mor ning. ning. (go to bed early tonight)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 70. He always gives you the wrong advice. (not listen to him)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 71. Everything will be all right. (not worry so much)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 72. He doesn’t like this job because it’s so boring. (look for another one)    __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 73. It’s so late to play music so loudly, we’ll wake up the  neighbours. (turn it off)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 74. Your hair is so long. (have a haircut)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. He doesn’t understand the lesson. (meet the teacher after class)   __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XI. You the following set of words and phrases to write complete sentences.

76. People/ decorate/ homes/ plants/ flowers.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. People/ try/nice/ polite/ each other/ because/ becaus e/ they/ want/good luck/ New Year's Ye ar's Day.  ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. They/ visit/ relatives/ friends/ they/ exchange/ New Year's wishes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. Many people/ go/ pagoda/ have/ happy year/ their family.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. Tet/ a time/ fun/ festivals/ throughout/ country.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 76

 

 

TE ST YOURS YOURSE E LF 2 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. big B. wish C. fish 2.  A. pagoda B. torch C. overseas 3.  A. temple B. messy C. decorate 4.  A. museum B. windsurfing C. surround

D. high D. sofa D. department D. diverse

5.  A. thrilling

D. thread

B. then II. Choose the correct answers.

C. through

6. Hoi An is a  a  city and it is famous for its old buildings, shops, pagodas and houses. houses. history   historic   historian   young   B. historic C. historian D. young A. history 7. My neighbourhood is great for outdoor activities a ctivities   it has beautiful parks, sandy beaches and fine weather . B. so C.  but  but  D. and and   A.  because  because  there   ?" - "They are very friendly." friendly."   8. "What are the people there A. love B. liking C. like D. look 9. Ha Noi is  is  exciting than Viet Tri City. City. B. much more  more  C. more much  much  D. only more  more  A. much  much  10. The Nile River is the river in the world, world,   the Amazon is the widest. widest . so   because   but   but A. long - so B. long - because C. longer - but  D. longest –  but 11. The Himalayas, a mountain range, is  is  with forests and many kinds of plants and animals animals.. B. wide wide   C. diversity diversity   D. diverse diverse   A. large  large  12. If you want to go to the Himalayas, I think you  you   take a waterproof coat  coat  because because it is cold and rainy there.. there must   mustn't  can't  B. mustn't  C. can D. can't  A. must  The meeting is very important, so you you    be late! late! 13. The 13. A. must  must  B. mustn't  mustn't  C. should should   D. shouldn't shouldn't   14. You  You  take all necessary things along with you bbefore efore you start the trip. trip. shouldn't  mustn't   can  should  B. shouldn't  C. mustn't D. can  A. should  is  15. Tet is    A. time  time

for family gatherings gatherings. . B. the time time  

C. a time  time 

D. times times  

the   time to plant trees is spring?  spring?  16. Do you think the good  better    best  well  A. good  B.  better  C. best  D. well  17. In 17.  In the cinema we we   eat or drink anything anything.. should  shouldn't   must  B. should  C. shouldn't D. can A. must  18.We keep quiet in the library so that everyone can enjoy reading books books.. B. shouldn't  shouldn't  C. can D. can't  can't  A. should  should  19. Many foreign visitors come to Ha Long Bay Ba y because of its natural  natural   .  beautiful  pretty  beauty  B. beautiful  C.  pretty  D. wonder   A.  beauty  20. You can have the meaning of a new word by looking it  it   in a dictionary dictionary.. A. in B. up C. on 21. The Himalayas  Himalayas  the world's highest mountain - Mount Everest Everest.. A. have B. get C. takes 22. New Year is one of four important in the United States.

D. at D. contains

A. parties

B. events

C. festivals

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

D. celebration  Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 77

 

 

23. Is it true that Ha Noi is city in Viet Nam? A. the large B. largest C. larger 24. Your vocabulary will get by reading a lot of books. A. nicer B. better C. easier 25. "  " - "It's one of the most beautiful beaches in the world." . world." . A. What is My Khe Beach in Da Nang like? B. What does My Khe Beach in Da Nang look like? C. How does My Khe Beach in Da Nang look?

D. the largest D. higher

D. What does My Khe Beach in Da Nang like? III. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that bets answers the question about the passage.

Thanksgiving Day is a holiday that Americans celebrate the honor of everything the country offered to their ancestors, who were among the first immigrants to the United States. When they first came to America, they saw that there were enough food and opportunity for everyone. They were even helped by the Indians, who taught them how to grow all kinds of new vegetables, such as corn and yams, or sweet potatoes. On Thanksgiving Day, it is traditional to eat a big meal together. Americans eat food that was found here by their ancestors. They usually eat turkey with sweet potatoes, Indian corn bread, and have pumpkin pie for dessert. Every Thanksgiving Day, a giant parade is held by one of the most famous department stores in New York. It is an annual event. And at the end of the parade, children can even see Santa Claus, who is visiting from the  North Pole. Santa Claus is invited to remind children and parents that Christmas is is not far away. 26. Thanksgiving Day is celebrated . A. to honor the new country B. to remind people of cold winter C. to honor their ancestors D. to remind people of Indians 27. The first white people to America were helped by Indians . A. to know how to grow new vegetables B. to have more opportunities C. to form the new nation D. All are correct 28. The traditional meal on Thanksgiving Day is . A. a big meal with turkey, Indian corn bread, and pumpkin pie B. everything they have C. food provided by the Indians D. food provided by Santa Claus 29. What is the main activity in New York on Thanksgiving Day? A. A giant parade is held by one of the most famous department d epartment stores. B. A big march by Santa Claus. C. A giant parade is held by Santa Claus, children and their parents. D. A giant parade is held by the Indians. 30. Santa Claus is invited to the parade on Thanksgiving Day . A. to remind everyone that New Year is not far away B. to remind everyone that a new Thanksgiving Day is coming C. to remind everyone that Christmas is not far away D. to remind everyone of

their ancestors

IV. Write the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.

31. Antarctica is colder than any other places in the world.

Antarctica is ____________________________________________________________________________.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 78

 

 

32. Doing morning exercises every morning is good for you. You ___________________________________________________________________________________. 33. My father has a plan to repaint our house before Tet. My father ________________________________ _____ _______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________. __________________. 34. Fansipan is higher than any other mountains in Indochina (Viet Nam, Laos, and Cambodia). Fansipan is _____________________________________________________________________________. 35. Nam is the tallest student in his class.  Nobody in Nam's class ___________________________________ _________ ______________________________________________________ _________________________________. _____. V. Write the correct sentences, using the words or phrases given.

36. Tomorrow/ Hoa/ buy/ flowers/ her father's birthday.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 37. Nobody/ my class/ better/ Maths/ Minh.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 38. Twelve o'clock/ night/ everyone/ ever yone/ say "Happy New Year"/ they/ the y/ their friends/ relatives/ good luck.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 39. How often/ you/ go fishing/ your father?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 40. New market/ inconvenient/ because/ it/ far/ our flat building.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VI. Fill in each gap in the passage with one suitable word from the box.

have

give

decorate

first

envelopes

wishes

shopping

festival

gatherings

love

Tet is is a national and family (41) . It is an occasion for every Vietnamese to (42) a good time while thinking about the last year and the next year. At Tet, people (43) streets and  public buildings, almost all shops are crowded with people (44) for Tet. Tet is a time for family (45) . At home, everything is tidy; people cook special food. First-footing is made when the (46) visitor comes, and parents give children lucky money in red (47) . Tet is also a time for peace and (48) . During Tet, friends, relatives, and neighbours (49) each other their best (50) for the new year.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 79

 

 

Unit 7: A. I. 1.  2.  3. 

TELEVISION

PHONETICS Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. A. when B. where C. best A. weather B. newsreader C. teaching A. clumsy B. cute C. but

4.  A. earth 5.  A. the

B. thanks B. think

C. feather C. with

D. detective D. repeat D. just D. theater D. they

II. Put the words in the correct column column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part.

three bathroom throat thunder theater than

thrilling breathe weather threaten earth neither

mother breath athlete three through anything

/θ/  …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………  

birthday theme although them both thirty

tooth those feather the with thing /ð/

…………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………   …………………………………………………  

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Match the words in A with the appropriate words in B to form the correct phrase.

A 1. film 2. cartoon 3. international 4. remote 5. game 6. news

B channel control television show character button

Answer 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. local volume

director programme

7. 8.

II. Put the words or phrases in the box in the correct column. We can put some words in more than one column.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 80

 

 

reporter romance weatherman  game show viewer weather forecast horror  science

documentary director action designers newsreader fashion writer character

comedy drama sports sitcom producer love story news animals

cartoon cameraman actor quiz show silent weathergirl MC war

People

Programmes

Kinds of film

………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… .

………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… . ………………………………… .

……………………………………..   ……………………………………..   ……………………………………..   ……………………………………..   ……………………………………..   ……………………………………..   ……………………………………..   ……………………………………..  

………………………………… .

………………………………… .

……………………………………..  

III. Choose the word from the box for each description below.

1. 2. 3. 4.

MC

weather forecast

animal programme

documentary

game show

cartoon

educational programme

comedy

sitcom

quiz show

news headline

drama

_________ _________ _________ _________

: : : :

an amusing play or film with a happy ending. a funny TV show in which the same characters appear in each programme in a different different story. a television programme where people get points by answering questions or doing things. a television television programme programme that gives facts or information information about a subject.

5. _________ 6. _________ 7. _________ 8. _________ 9. _________ 10. _________ 11. _________ 12. _________

: : : : : : : :

a play for the theatre, television or radio. a television programme to give the description of the weather for the next few days. a competition on TV in which people try to answer questions to test their their knowledge. a television programme telling us about the life of birds, elephants, tigers, tigers, lions, and so on. a television programme for schools, and students. the important items of news read on television. a person who introduces guests at the right time at an important event. a programme that tells a story by using using moving pictures.

IV. Match the questions with the answers. Answer Questions

Answers

1. What is the name of your favourite TV programme? a) Because they are colourful and funny. 2. Why do you like the programme? b) It's Steven Spielberg. 3. How many hours a day do you watch? c) In California, USA.

4. What time is the cartoon on?  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

d) In 1926.  Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 81

 

 

5. Who is the director of the film? 6. What channel is the film on? 7. Why do you like cartoons? 8. When did John Logie Baird make the first TV set? 9. How often do you watch football on TV? 10. Where is Hollywood?

e) Because it is very exciting. f) Twice a week, usually at weekend. g) About two hours a day. h) It's the Science programme. i) It's on VTV3 j) It's at 7:30 pm.

V. Make questions for the underlined part in each sentence.

1. I like TV game shows best.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 2. TV viewers can know about the weather in their regions from the weather forecast.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 3. We go to the zoo twice a month.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. We can meet in front of the theater at 7.30.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Bob likes the comedy because it makes him laugh.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 6. The documentary lasts forty-five minutes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. Steven Spielberg is the director of the film. film.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 8. On VTV3, there are three films on this week.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. Millions of children around the world enjoy the cartoon "Hello Fatty!"  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. Pokémon cartoons are made in Japan.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ and,, so, so, but  or VI. Complete the sentences with and  or because.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

I didn't feel well He liked her I liked Spain She likes swimming We were late

I stayed at home. she was happy. I wanted to go home. jogging. there was an accident.

VII. Match the sentence halves, writing the answer in each blank.

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

1. I looked for the key, 2. My friends were ill 3. I got good marks on the test 4. The film started at ten, 5. She likes you a lot 6. I lost my money,

a. and had to stay at home. b. because I studied very hard. c. so we couldn't be home by eleven. d. so I couldn't buy anything. e. but I just couldn't find it. f. because she thinks you are very intelligent.

VIII. Match the sentence halves in column A and column B to make correct sentences, writing the answer in each blank.

Questions

Answers

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 82

 

 

1. The film isn't very good 2. That TV channel attracts millions of TV viewers

a) so will not watch it. b) so he can't watch his favourite  programme. 3. Although the football matches on TV are very c) and it got many international prizes. late, 4. Life is more comfortable now d) because he likes discovering the universe. 5. The film Titanic was directed directed by James Cameron, Cameron, e) many many people stay up late to watch watch them. 6. That programme is very boring f) but the Science programme is on VTV2. 7. Tom often watches the programme "Journey to g) I don't have time to watch it very often. Jupiter" 8. The game show "Who Wants To Be A h) and I don't enjoy it very much. Millionaire" is on VTV3 9. Nam is going to take a test tomorrow i) because it offers many different interesting programmes. 10. Although I like the Disney Channel very much, j) but bu t neighbours n eighbours don't don 't spend much time together. IX. Match the beginnings beginnin gs (1-5, 6-10) with the t he correct endings (a-e, f-j), and write writ e the answer in each blank.

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

l. I want to see a British film and 2. I want to see a British film but 3. I want to see a British film or 4. I want to see a British film, so 5. I want see British films, because 6. They're listening to music and 7. They're listening to music, but 8. They're listening to music, or 9. They're listening to music, so 10. They're listening to music, because

a) I don't know which one. b) they are always funny. c) let's see what's on at the cinema. d) an American one. I want to see two films. e) an American one. I don't mind. f) I don't think it's rock music. g) it's very exciting. h) watching TV - I'm not sure. i) they can't hear me. j) playing computer games at the same time.

C. SPEAKING I. Complete the conversation with the clauses below. Then practice it with your partner.

Diana  Jim  Diana  Jim  Diana Jim  Diana 

 she gave us directions

we went home

they were for the wrong cinema

we couldn't find the cinema

Hi. Jim, did you enjoy the film last night? We didn't see it because (1) ___________________________ _______________________________. ____. Why didn't you ask someone the way? Well, we asked an old lady and (2) __________________________ __________________________.. So the problem? Shewhat gavewas us directions but (3) __________________________ ______________________________. ____. The wrong cinema? What did you do?

Jim 

We didn't want to see the film there so (4) ____________________.

II. Complete the conversation with the phrases below. Then practice it with your partner.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 83

 

 

But we will What kinds Lien:  Hong:  Lien:  Hong:  Lien:  Hong:  Lien: 

How about you I'm sorry. I can't 

Would you like

(1) of TV programs do you like best? I like to watch women's program best. (2) ? I prefer listening to music. There is a good music performance at Lan Anh Club this weekend. (3) to go with me? I'd love to, but (4) . I have to go to my cousin's birthday party on Saturday evening. (5) go on Sunday. That's great.

D. READING I. Reading the passage, and answer the questions.

Today, there is a TV set in nearly every home. People watch television every day, and some people watch it from morning until night. Americans watch television about 35 hours a week. But is television good or bad for you? People have different answers. Some say that there is a lot of violence on TV today, the programs are terrible and people don't get any exercise because they only sit and watch TV. Others think that TV programs  bring news from around the world, help you learn many useful things, especially children. Thanks lo television,  people learn about life in other countries, and it helps people relax after a long day of hard work. 1. Is television very popular nowadays? Why?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. How many hours do Americans watch TV a day?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Why don't some people like like watching watching television? television?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. What does television bring to you? you?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. What do you you learn from television?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. Read the article and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

Information about what happens in the world comes to us in many ways. Television and radio are two important ways of the news. They get the news out faster than the newspapers and magazines, and they don't have to be read. Television and radio stations broadcast the news several times each day. In America, there are the news programmes every hour. People can choose the favourite TV programmes, such as sports, films, fashion, news, etc. People who cannot canno t read get the news from television or radio easily. True

False

1. There are only two ways of getting the news.

 

 

2. Television and radio get the news faster than other ways. 3. Television stat stations ions broadcast the news several times each day.

 

 

 

 

4. People cannot choose the TV programmes programmes that they they like. 5. Television can bring the news to people who cannot read.

   

   

III. Read the text and tell the names of the people in Bart Simpson's family and their jobs.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 84

 

 

Bart Simpson is the star of the Simpsons, a popular American TV programme. Eleven million Americans watch it every week. The Simpsons live in Springfield and Bart goes to Springfield Elementary School. He's very lazy and he isn't popular with the teachers, but his classmates like him. Bart has two sisters, Lisa and Maggie. Lisa is very intelligent and she studies hard. Maggie is a baby. Bart's parents are Homer and Marge. Homer works at a power station from Monday to Friday and watches TV at weekends. Marge stays at home with Maggie. 1. Bart Simpson: _________________________ _______________________________________ ______________ 2. His two sisters: ________________________ ______________________________________ ______________ 3. His father: ____________________________ __________________________________________ ______________ 4. His mother: ___________________________ _________________________________________ ______________ E. WRITING Write a short paragraph about your favourite TV programme. Use the clues given.

1. What is the name of your your favourite TV programme? programme? - Game show: Children are Always Right. 2. What is it about? - To test your general knowledge about nature, science, etc. 3. What channel is it on? - On VTV3. 4. When is it broadcast? - At 8.30 pm on Saturday. 5. Why do you like it? - Useful, interesting, and exciting. 6. What can you you learn from from the programme? programme? - Interesting facts about the nature, and the world.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 85

 

 

TEST (UNIT 7) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. thirty B. theme C. both 2.  A. brother B. weather C. through 3.  A. schedule B. comedy C. red 4.  A. channel B. game C. national

D. them D. than D. when D. relax

5.  A. show

D. most

B. programme

C. sport

II. 6.  7.  8.  9. 

Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. A. comedian B. newsreader C. film producer A. cartoon B. world news C. studio A. popular B. reporter C. exciting A. boring B. international C. national 10. A. viewer B. audience C. watcher

D. programme D. documentary D. educational D. local D. director

III. Choose the correct answers.

11. Disney Channel is one of the most  most  A. good - for   B. exciting - of  

channels  popular - to  to  C. popular

children children . . popular - for   D.  popular

12. A. shows   My  because  family  enjoys watching B. so game shows  because

they interesting C.  but   butare   very exciting and interesting. D. and and   .

television channel in Viet Nam, and it attracts millions of TV viewers in Viet Nam. Nam. 13. VTV is a  a  A. wide B. local C. international D. national . TV programme?" - "It's cartoons" cartoons"   14. "What is your   favourite   like   A. good B. favourite C. best D. like 15. "  do you like the Modern English programme? " - "Because it helps me m e with my English."  English."  A. What B. How C. When D. Why to tell TV viewers what the weather is like. like . 16. My brother wants to become a  a  weatherman   producer   A. newsreader   B. actor   C. weatherman  D. producer  17. TV can join in some game shows through telephone or by mail mail.. B. weathermen weathermen   C. newsreaders newsreaders   D. viewers viewers   A.  people  people  18. are films by pictures, not real people and often for children. children. Documentaries  B. Love stories stories   Cartoons   A. Documentaries  C. Cartoons D. Detective stories 19. Are there any good programs  programs  teenagers on TV tonight?  tonight?  A. to B. for   C. of D. with will   the first part of the film on VTV1 VTV1.. 20. My father works late tomorrow, so he will A. miss  miss  B. lose lose   C. forget forget   D. cut cut   21. That TV programme is not only interesting  interesting   it also teaches children many things about family and friendship. friendship. A. but B. so C. and D. because is the weather forecast programme on?" - "At 7.30 pm every day day.."  22. "  What  How   When  Where   A. What  B. How C. When  D. Where 23. the newsreader on BBC One reads very fast, my brother can hear everything in the news. news. A. But B. Although C. When D. But 24. Children can participate in a TV  TV  for a game show or a quiz show. show.

A. channel

B. competition

C. studio

D. cartoon

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 86

 

 

25. Millions of children around the world enjo enjoyy the cartoon because it can both b oth   and young audience. audience. education   B. entertainment –  education  education A. entertain - education C. entertainment - educate educate   D. entertain - educate  educate  26. Many people with different skills work hard  hard   quality programmes for television television.. produce   producing  producing   produce  B. to produce C.  producing  D. to producing A.  produce  27. The football match is on at 2 am  am  I can't watch it it.. although   C.  but  but  D. then then   A. so B. although

a

28. My father likes watching sports sports   on VTV3. VTV3. channels   events   athletes   matches  B. channels C. events D. athletes A. matches  29. If you want to know wha whatt the weather is like tomorrow, watch the  the   . A. weather forecast  forecast  B. music show show   C. game show show   D. quiz show show   30. "  is that TV programme directed by?" - "By a famous Vietnamese director ."  A. What B. Where C. When D. Who IV. Choose the right word from the box for each description below.

TV reporter

TV producer

comedian

cameraman

director

31. ____________: a person who tells the actors, cameramen, etc. what to do in a programme, film, play, etc. 32. ____________: an actor who makes people laugh by telling jokes. 33. ____________: a person who finds and speaks the news on the television. 34. ____________: a person that makes television programme. 35. ____________: a person who operates a camera for a film or a television programme. V. Make questions for the underlined part in each sentence.

36. Watching too much TV is not good because it hurts your eyes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 37. We often read books and play sports in our free time.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 38. The Wingless Penguin is about the adventure of a child penguin who has no win.  ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 39. Children love the Wingless Penguin series because the child penguin is so cute, clever, and funny.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 40. The programme is on the Disney Channel.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 41. The TV programme "Let's Learn" appears in over 80 countries.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 42. Both parents and their children enjoy the programme.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 43. The Animals programme is on at 8 o'clock Wednesday night.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 44. I watch TV one or two hours a day.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

45. I can get enough information for my essay by watching TV and visiting some websites.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 87

 

 

VI. Match the questions with the answers, and write the answers in the blanks. Questions Answers

 ______ 46. What time is the film on VTV3 on?  ______ 47. Who is the favourite VTV newsreader this year?  ______ 48. What will the  Animals programme tell  people about?  ______ 49. Why can't you watch the football match on VTV3 tonight?  ______ 50. What's your favourite cartoon?  ______ 51. How long does the film last?  ______ 52. What is the event in the Sports   programme this evening?  ______ 53. Who is the leading actor in that film?  ______ 54. What kind of TV programme do you like most?  ______ 55. Why do children like the TV series?

a) It's the Formula 1 Racing 46 in Malaysia.  b) Because they are interesting and entertaining. c) It's Johnny Depp. d) It's the Cartoons programme. e) At 9 pm. f) It's Mr Quang Minh. g) It's about the life of birds, elephants, tigers, lions, etc. h) Because it's too late. i) Of course, it's Tom and Jerry.  j) About one and a half hour.

VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text.

Television first came some sixty years ago in the 1950s. Nowadays, it is one of the most (56) sources of entertainment for both the old and the young. Television brings (57) for children, world news, music and many other (58) . If someone likes sports, he can just choose the right sports, (59) . It is not difficult for us to see why (60) is a TV set in almost every home today. 56. A. cheap B. expensive C. popular D. exciting 57. A. news B. cartoons C. sports D. plays 58. A. sets B. reports C. channels D. programmes 59. A. athletes B. channel C. time D. studio 60. A. it B. this C. that D. there VIII. Read the passage, and decide whether the sentences are true (T) or false (F).

Television is an important invention of the 20 th century. It has been so popular that we can't imagine what life would be like if there were no television. Television is a major means of communication and entertainment. It brings pictures and sound from around the world into millions of homes. Through television, viewers can see and learn about people, places and things in distant lands. Television widens our knowledge by introducing new ideas which may lead us to new hobbies and recreations. In addition to the news, television provides us with a variety of programs that can satisfy every taste. Most people now seem to like spending their evenings watching television than to go out. 61. Television is an important means of communication. ____________ 62. Television provides us with a variety of programs. ____________ 63. Most people don't like watching TV in the evening. ____________ 64. Television can't satisfy all our tastes. ____________ 65. People can learn many things through TV. ____________ IX. There is ONE mistake in each sentence, try to find the mistake and correct it.

66. There are much music programmes on TV nowadays.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 67. The Discovery Channel makes education funny for children all over the world.

 __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ 68. Would you like go to the theater with me tonight?  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 88

 

 

 ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 69. Although I enjoy sports every ever y much, but I don't often watch the Sports programmes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 70. The News programme help TV viewers know about what happens every day in their country as well as all over the world.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ X. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.

71. Cartoons are colourful and funny: that's why wh y children enjoy watching them. Children enjoy watching cartoons ___________________________ ______________________________________________________ ________________________________ _____ 72. VTV Channels offer many interesting programmes in different subjects. VTV Channels are broadcast in several languages. VTV Channels offer many interesting interesting programmes in different different subjects ________________________ _____________________________ _____  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 73. That film is very famous in the USA but not many Vietnamese people know it.  Not many Vietnamese people know that film ___________________________ __________________________________________________ _______________________ 74. Many people think the Fashion programme is only for women; the programme is for everyone. Many people think the Fashion programme is only for women __________________________ ____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. I am going to have hav e a test tomorrow; I can't watch the cartoon. I am going to have a test tomorrow tomorrow __________________________ _____________________________________________________ ________________________________ _____ XI. Make sentences using the words and phrases given.

76. Game show/ this week/ test/ knowledge/ rain forests. fo rests.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. Questions/ quiz show/ about different subjects/ grade one/ grade six.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. That singer/ live show/ theater/ be/ TV/ tomorrow.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. That channel/ tell/ people/ life/ animals/ world.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. ________________________ Show/ help/ us/ remember/ childhood.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 89

 

 

Unit 8:

SPORTS AND GAMES

A. PHONETICS SPORTS AND GAMES I. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciati pronunciation on of the underlined part.

there ear idea where chair

here appear cheer fair sphere

fear wear pear year air

care beer prepare dear pair

series bear share near aerobics

/eə/ 

/ɪə/ 

……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….  

………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………  

II. Find the word which A. hear A. near A. here A. Mary A. prepare

has a different sound in the underlined part. B. fear C. dear B. appear C. bear B. there C. series B. air C. chair B. carry C. share

D. wear D. idea D. sphere D. marry D. fair

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Fill the words or phrases from the box into the correct column.  column. 

homework aerobics   volleyball

table tennis jogging housework

shopping badminton soccer

swimming tennis cycling

fishing videogames camping

do

go

play

……………………………………   ……………………………………   …………………………………… ……………………………………  

……………………………………   …………………………………… ……………………………………   ……………………………………  

……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………  

II. Complete the table with the sports in the box.

athletics

basketball

badminton

cycling

 football

hockey

judo

rugby

 skiing

swimming

tennis

volleyball

Individual sports

 

Team sports

  ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………  

………………………………………………. ………………………………………………   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………    Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 90

 

 

III. Complete the sentences with the correct form of do or p  pla lay  y .

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Do you often My brother I like My friend My mum We My dad My sister enjoys

exercise? basketball for the school team. tennis. judo twice a week. yoga at the new sports centre. gymnastics at school yesterday. football for the town team when he was young. table-tennis in her free time.

IV. Complete the sentences with the correct words. You can see the first letter of each word.

I usually 1c to school. I have an old bike so I don't worry about it. Sometimes when it is 2 raining, I go to school  b car. At the weekend, I usually go to my friend's house. He lives fifty 3 metres away from me so I can w there in one minute. I often visit my grandparents. They live on the fourth floor. I usually 4t the elevator, but sometimes 5 6 7 8 it doesn't t and I w u the s . It's good exercise. V. Complete the sentences with the verb + -ing.

do

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

John loves They enjoy We really like Sam hates I don't like Do you like

 

practise

play

ski

swim

watch

catch

pick up 

judo. the Olympics on TV. in the Alps in winter. rugby but he likes football. in the pool at the sport centre. running in the morning?

VI. Complete the sentences with the correct words from the box.

throw 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

hit

kick

bounce

In basketball you the ball on the floor. In tennis you the ball. In football you the ball. In rugby you the ball to people in your team. In football the goalkeeper needs to the ball. In hockey you never the ball.

VII. Give the names of the sports, using the words or phrases given.

1. _______________: bicycle, pedals, tyre, cap. 2. _______________: gloves, ring, heavyweight, champion. 3. _______________: ball, low net, table, round bats. 4. _______________: ball, kick, score, goal, referee. 5. _______________: large ball, open net, metal ring, throw. 6. _______________: shuttlecock, high net, hit. 7. _______________: large ball, high net, hands, hit, (not to touch) 8. _______________: pool, goggles, swimsuit. 9. _______________: skis, downhill, snow. 10. : boat, sails, wind, sailor.

ground.

11. _______________: racket, central net, small ball, hit, hit, small ground. 12. _______________: square board, pieces, move, king.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 91

 

 

VIII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

I (not be) very happy yesterday. I (buy) a ticket for the football match yesterday. Kate (not know) about the exam and she did very badly. I went to the shop but I (not have) any money. It (be) a great film in 2010. I (leave) my school bag at school this morning. Our teacher (tell) us to be quiet yesterday. The people in the café (not be) friendly when I was there yesterday.

IX. Make questions and answers, using the cues given. 1. A: you/ be in the bathroom/ when/ I/ phone? B: No/ not. I/ be asleep. A:  ____________________________________ B:_____________________________________ 2. A: you/ like/ the present/ I/ give/ you? B: Yes/ I. It/ be/ great. A:  ____________________________________ B:_____________________________________ 3. A: Where/ you/ go on holiday/ last year? B: We/ go/ Da Lat. We/ have/ a great time. A:  ____________________________________ B:_____________________________________ 4. A: How many people/ be/ the party/ last night? B: There/ be/ ten people. It/ not be/ a good party. A:  ____________________________________ B:_____________________________________ X. Complete the sentences with the past form of the verbs from the box.

ask

jump

rescue

stop

try

close

laugh

start

study

walk  

1. The firemen the woman from the burning house. 2. My father Maths at university. 3. The programme was very funny, we a lot. 4. The teacher me lots of questions yesterday. 5. You're late! The lesson ten minutes ago. 6. It was very cold so we the window. 7. After the film, we home. 8. The cat up into the tree. 9. I to pick the bag up, but it was very heavy. 10. We were very tired so we walking. XI. Complete the funny story with the Past Simple of the verbs in brackets.

It (1. be)

Sunday, the day of the big game. The players (2. arrive)

early.

They (3. be) excited. Everyone (4. want) to play. There (5. be) lots of people in the stadium. They (6. wave) when the players (8. walk) on to the ground.

and (7. cheer)

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 92

 

 

The referee (9. call)  ball?" Nobody (11. answer) All the players (12. look) (14. cancel) the game.

the captains to the middle. The referee (10. ask) . at the ground. There (13. be)

. "Where is the no ball. The referee

XII. Read about Fiona Campbell's journey. Fill in the gaps with the Past Simple of the verbs in brackets.

Fiona Campbell was the first woman to walk around the world. She (1. start) her  journey in the UK in 1983 and then in 1985 she (2. walk) across the USA. In 1988 she (3. go) from Sydney to Perth in only 95 days. On April 2nd 1991, Fiona (4. leave) later - a journey CapeofTown in miles. South Africa. She arrive) 29 months 10,000 Then she (6.(5. walk) (7. finish) her journey in October 1994. She (8. travel) and (9. raise) £120,000 for charity. Fiona also (10. write) her journey called The Whole Story.

Morocco across inEurope and 19,586 miles a book about

XIII. Complete the text. Use the past simple of the verbs in brackets.  

Last year my family (1. go) to Greece on holiday. We (2. meet) a lot of new people and I (3. take) a lot of photographs. We (4. stay) in a good hotel near the sea, and there (5. be) a lot of things to do there. Unfortunately, on the first day I (6. have) some  problems. I (7. hit) my head on the bathroom door and then I (8. cut) my finger, so for two days I (9. read) a lot of books and (10. play) games on my laptop. After that I (11. do) a lot of things - swimming, sailing, and so on. When we (12. leave) , I (13.  be) really tired! I (14. tell) Dad that I needed another holiday! C. SPEAKING I. Complete the conversation with the words in the box.

them

played

Pauline: Owen: Pauline: Owen: Pauline:

You look tired. I am. I (1) What was the (2) 5-1 to (3) Oh (4) .

Owen:

It's not the (5)

end

score

scored

dear  

football this morning. ? . of the world. I (6)

our goal.

II. Match the questions and answers, and then write the answers in the blanks.

 ______ 1. What's your favourite sport?  ______ 2. Who's your favourite sportswoman?  ______ 3. How often do you go swimming?  ______ 4. What's your favourite football team?  ______ 5. Do you like volleyball?

a. No, not really. b. Three or four times a week. c. She's a skier - but I can't think of her name right now. d. Liverpool. e. Running

III. Reorder the phrases to make a conversation.  

Conversation 1  Christina  Michelle  Christina    Michelle   Christina  

I'm spending the evening at school. Really? A long evening. Yeah, we're having a video evening with our language teachers. At school? Yeah, until midnight.

Christina  Michelle   1 Michelle 

Cool. Can I come too? What are you doing tomorrow evening, Christina?

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 93

 

 

Conversation 2  Oliver  1 Tim   Oliver   Tim   Oliver   Tim

OK. See you on Monday then! What are you doing this weekend? Oh, they're fun! There's a lot of great rides. No, thanks. I don't really like theme parks. I'm going to Luna Park with some friends. Would you like to come? Anyway, I'm going to the youth club on Saturday, then I'm going to football match on Sunday.

IV. Complete the conversation with the words below.

tennis

twice

favourite

game

often

sport  

Nicole  Mathew Nicole Matthew Nicole Matthew  Nicole

What's your (1) sport, Matthew? Hmm, probably basketball. But I also like (2) Are you a good tennis player? I'm OK, I think. How (3) do you play a week? What? Tennis or basketball? Both.

Matthew Nicole Matthew  Nicole Matthew Nicole

Well, I playYou tennis a week, and basketball four times a week. I'm in a team. Oh really? do a(4)lot of sport. True. What about you? What's your favourite (5) ? Watching basketball on TV. Oh, would you like to watch tomorrow's (6) with me? Sure, why not?

.

V. Read the three conversations, and then do the tasks. 1 Rosy:  Hello, there. Where are you going? I'm going to the gym. I do exercise there twice a week. Diana:  I went to the gym last month, but I didn't like it. It was full of noisy teenagers. Rosy:  Diana:  Rosy: Diana:  Rosy: 

You can join this gym. It's nice and quiet. Really? Where is it? On High Street. Why don't you come and see it? OK, great. Let's go.

Frank:  Lisa:  Frank:  Lisa:  Frank:  Lisa: 

Hi, there. My name's Frank. Hello, I'm Lisa. Pleased to meet you. How do you know Nigel? I'm his cousin. Oh, right. So do you live near here? No, I'm from Banbury but my family are staying there this week so Nigel invited me here to his

Frank: 

 birthday party.Hey, Lisa. Do you play table-tennis? I'm very glad.

2

3

Simon: David:

Hello. Are you new here? Yes, I am My name's David.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 94

 

 

Simon:  David:  Simon:  David: Simon: 

Hi, David. I'm Simon, the teacher here. So, you're interested in judo. Yes, I am. I love watching watching it on the TV and I saw your poster in the shopping centre. Great. Well, there there are nine other people coming here every week so so you're the tenth. tenth. Let me introduce the others to you. Yes. Thanks. Sorry, I'm a bit nervous. Don't worry. There aren't any exams today!

A. Match the conversations (1-3) with the situations (a-d). There is a one extra situation. Conversation 1 ____________ a. At a party. Conversation 2 Conversation 3 

 ____________ ____________

b. At a sports lesson. c. At a shopping centre. d. In the street.

B. Decide whether the sentences are true (T) or false (F).

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Rosy went to the same gym that Diana now goes to. Rosy goes to the gym with Diana. Lisa doesn't live in the same town as Frank. It is Lisa's birthday party. David came to the judo lesson because he saw information about the classes on TV. 6. Simon now has ten students in his class.

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

D. READING I. Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

Hoa is student in class 6B. She likes sports very much. She goes swimming in the afternoon. She plays  badminton on weekend and does aerobics every day. I play table tennis with her. Sports are very good. 1. Does Hoa like sports?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What does she do in in the afternoon? afternoon?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Which sports sports does she play on weekend?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Does she do aerobics every day?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Are sports good?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ lse e. II. Read the passage, and then decide whether the sentences are True or F als

 Nam and Tan are students in grade 6. They Th ey are good friends. At school, they are in the same class. They live near school, and they walk to school every morning. In the afternoon, they often go to their sports club. They like sports very much. Nam plays badminton, and Tan plays table tennis. Sometimes they go swimming or play soccer with their classmates. They don't have time to go camping. 1. Nam and Tan are not in the same class. ____________ 2. They are good friends. ____________ 3. They go to school by bicycle. ____________ 4. In the afternoon, they often go to their sports club. ____________ 5. Nam plays table tennis. ____________

6. They don t play sports with their classmates. 7. They go swimming every day. 8. They never go camping.

____________ ____________ ____________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 95

 

 

III. Read the story and decide if the sentences are true (T) or false (F).

On Saturday, Patricia was in the park when she saw a boy on a mountain bike. He was on the hill when suddenly he fell off his bike. Patricia ran over to help. "Where's my helmet?" he shouted. It was under a park  bench so Patricia went to get it. Just then another boy ran past, took the boy's mountain bike and rode away. "Stop!" Patricia shouted. She ran after the other boy and stopped him. He got off the bike and ran away. Patricia took the bike back to the boy, "Thank you, Patricia," he said. "How do you know my name?" Patricia asked. "I live next to you," he said. "My name's Tom". On Sunday Tom left some flowers on her doorstep to say "thank you". 1. Patricia was in the street when she saw a boy on a mountain bike. T/F _______________ 2. The boy fell off his bike. T/F _______________ 3. Another boy rode away with his helmet. T/F ______________ 4. Patricia stopped the other boy and took the bike back. T/F _______________ 5. Tom gave Patricia a CD to say "thank you". T/F _______________ IV. Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

 Nam has some plans for this Sunday. First, in the morning he is going to the sports club to play table tennis with Lan and Ba. Next, in the afternoon he is going to buy some books at the bookstore and after that he's going to go swimming with Thanh and Tan. Finally, he is going to the movie theater with his parents and his sister in the evening. 1. What is Nam going to do on Sunday morning?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What is he going going to to do in the afternoon?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Is he going to play soccer on Sunday afternoon?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Where is he going going in the evening?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Who is he going to the movie theater with?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ V. Read the information and complete the table with a tick ( ) or a cross ( ).

Tent

Beach

Water sports

Café

Helen Julia Sara

- Helen is having a holiday with some friends at the beach. - Julia usually stays with her aunt, but this year she's camping with some friends. - Swimming is Sara's favourite activity, and she always alwa ys goes to the beach during d uring the holidays. - Helen's holiday flat is near the Plaza Hotel. - There's a nice café in the hotel and Helen often has lunch there. - Julia goes swimming in the sea every day. - Sara is sharing a tent with two other girls. -- Someone is teaching Julia howbecause to water-ski while she's on holiday. Helen doesn't go in the water she can't swim. - Sara is learning a new sport - she's having swimming lessons with Julia.

- Julia loves the Plaza Café, but she doesn't eat there every day. - Sara never goes out for lunch or dinner because she doesn't have much money.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 96

 

 

VI. Read the text and answer the questions.

 Sun, Se Sea a, and Sp Spo or t Australians love sport. They play it, they talk about it and they watch it on TV. Australian weather is perfect for sport, and there are thousands of great beaches, so swimming is very popular. The population of Australia is only about 20 million, but many man y of the best sportsmen and sportswomen in the world come from Australia. Young people in Australia are very active. More than 60% of children go to sports clubs. They also do activities with friends such as skateboarding, cycling, and rollerblading. The most popular sports for boys are football, swimming, Australian Rules football, tennis, cricket,  basketball, rugby, martial arts,forathletics, hockey. The most popular sports girls areand netball, swimming, tennis, basketball, gymnastics, football, athletics, martial arts, hockey, and horse riding. 1. What do Australians think of sport?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Why is swimming popular?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Which three sports are only popular with boys? boys?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Which three sports are only popular with girls? girls?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ E. WRITING I. Put the words in the correct order.

1. which/ you/ do/ sports/ at/do/ school?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. do/ when/ do/ you/ sport?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. favourite/ are/ your/ your/ who/ sports sports stars?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. do/ you/ you/ go/ how often/ running?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. team/ sports/ play/ you/ do?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. what/ TV/ you/ do/ on/ sports/ sports/ watch?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. football/ is/ what/ favourite/ your/ team?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. swimming/ you/ do/ go/ how often?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. Read the email, and then follow the instructions.  Hi Linda,  How are you? Thanks for your email. I think sports at school in Viet Nam are different from sports in Canada.  At school we do d o lots of PE (Physical Education) and in winter we play ice hockey - it's the national sport of Canada.

be cause I am very  I love going really fast on the ice! At our school girls and boys play rugby too. I don t like because bad at throwing and catching the ball, but I like watching our school rugby team when they play.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 97

 

 

 In the summer, we play table tennis and an d do athletics. I'm OK at table tennis and I'm really good at athletics because I can run fast. I run the 100m, 200m. There are lots of after-school sports clubs at my school: football, volleyball, basketball, and judo. I do judo on Tuesday and Thursday evenings. Sometimes in the summer I go swimming with my friends at the weekend and in winter we often go ice  skating. I love ice skating - it's great. Write soon.  Amy

Write an email to your friend about the sports at your school and the sports you do. Write about:   the sports you do at school   the sports you like/ don't like   the sports you're good at/ bad at  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________   

 ___________________________ _____________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 98

 

 

TEST (UNIT 8) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. square B. badminton C. grandfather 2.  A. idea B. reason C. feature 3.  A. easy B. please C. weak 4.  A. goggles B. sport C. stop

D. match D. teacher D. pear D. not

5.  A. match

D. chess

B. machine

C. champion

II. 6.  7.  8.  9. 

Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. A. basketball B. volleyball C. football A. marathon B. running C. swimming A. net B. ball C. racket A. swimmer B. gym C. athlete 10. A. sporty B. play C. hit

D. chess D. high jump D. bicycle D. player D. kick

III. Choose the correct answers.

11. I usually play football when I have  have   time   time   A. spare time B. good time 12. In team sports, the two teams teams  A. are B. do  do  

. time  C. no time 

times  D. times 

against each other  in order to get g et theD. better score  . score. C. make make   compete compete 

please . . draw on the walls and tables, please Do  Don't   Should   A. Do  B. Don't C. Should  Nam plays sports very often, so he looks very  . 14. Nam 14. very  sport  sports   sporty   A. sport  B. sports C. sporty 15. Last summer, II   fishing with my uncle in the afternoon afternoon.. B. went  went  C. goes goes   A. go  go  ot very good  good   16. I like watching football matches, but I am nnot on  A. at B. in C. on  17. Team sports are sometimes called  called  sports. sports. 13.

B. competition compete do you do judo?" competition     compete  - "Twice a  week." week.".. C. competitor   18. "A. When  Where   often   A. When  B. Where C. How often 19. sports do you like watching on TV? . A. How B. What C. Do the most popular sport in the world world.. 20. Football is regarded  regarded  A. for B. as C. like 21. Sports and games  games  an important part in our lives lives.. do   play  B. do C. go A.  play  22. When you go to the zoo, don't  don't   the animals. animals. A. play B. do C. tease 23. Playing sports helps us get  get   . free  fittest   A. fat B. free  C. fittest 24. Nam's 24.  Nam's dream is to become a  a  .

Shouldn't   D. Shouldn't sporting   D. sporting D. going  going 

 playing football. football. D. for   D. c  competitive ompetitive   D. Why D. How often D. of D. make D. watch D. fitter  

A. loser

B. champion champion  

C. contest  contest 

25. "I'd like to watch motor racing because it is very  very 

D. gamer  

." 

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp lớp 6 | 99

 

 

frightening   A. frightening

exciting   B. exciting

excited  C. excited 

boring  D.  boring 

 badminton in her free time. time. 26. My sister often  often  A.  play  play  B.  plays  plays  C. playing   playing  D. to play  play  sport. sport. 27. Marathon is considered a/an  a/an  A. team B. individual  individual  C. indoor   D. sporting  sporting  team   the match with Tran Phu School last Sunday Sunday.. 28. Our school football team wins  won   scores    scored   A. wins  B. won C. scores D. scored 29. Tam three goals for our team and made it a hat trick . B. scored C. plays  D. played  A. scores  scored    plays   played  scores  30. Blackburn Rover is at the bottom of the league. They  They  most of their matches this season season.. won  lost   scored    played   B. won  C. lost D. scored A. played IV. Complete the short conversations. Choose the correct answer: A, B or C.

31. "I enjoy playing tennis." A. - "I don't like reading." B. - "Where do you play?" C. - "In the afternoons." 32. "It's sunny today." A. - "I like camping." B. much the ticket?" C.  - "How "Yes. Do youiswant to go to the beach?"

33. "I love football." A. - "What's your favourite team?" B. - "Do you like football?" C. - "I'm watching a match." 34. "Can you pick up the ball, please?" A. - "I play football on Tuesdays." B. - "Yes, of course I do." C. - “Yes, here you are." 35. "What is the most popular sport in our ou r country?" Sunda y." A. - "Yes, I play football every Sunday." B. - "You know I do judo twice a week." C.  –  –  “I think football is" V. Match the questions with the answers, and write the answer in each blank. Answer

A

36. Which sports do you play? 36. Which play?   time?   37. What does your brother do in his spare time? 38. How often do you do karate? 39. What should I bring to play table tennis? 40. Will you come with me this Sunday morning?

B

a) Once a week. week.    b) Just a racket. racket.   c) I play table tennis. d) Well, OK. e) He plays football.

VI. Read the passage, and then decide whether the sentences are True or False.

I have three good friends: Ba, Lan and Hoa. They like sports. Ba likes soccer and tennis; Lan likes  badminton; and Hoa likes aerobics. They all like watching soccer on television. Ba often plays soccer in the

afternoon with his classmates at the weekend. Lan plays badminton twice a week; and Hoa does aerobics on Thursday and Sunday. Lan and Hoa play sports at the sports club.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 100

 

 

41. Ba, Lan and Hoa like the same sports. 42. Ba plays soccer every day. 43. Lan plays badminton three times a week. 44. Hoa does aerobics twice a week. 45. Lan and Hoa play sports at home.

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

VII. Read Leo's report about his favourite sport. Choose the correct answer A, B or C.

"Water polo is a new sport at our school, but we have a good team now. We practise after school on Thursday Northside we're the National Schools Competition. There at arethe seven playersPool in a and water polodoing team.well Theingame is a bit like football because each team tries to score a goal with a ball. But in water polo you don't use your feet - you catch and throw the ball with one hand. And you never stop swimming. A game lasts 32 minutes, and in that time you swim up and down a 30-metre pool lots of times. If you aren't fit, water polo isn't the sport for you! For me, it's great, because I love being in the water and I can swim fast. I also enjoy being part of a team. We have some excellent players and we're all good friends. So it's fun, and it's also a fantastic way to get fit."  Leo Johnson

46. People play water polo A. in a stadium 47. His team plays . A. well

.

48. Water polo players A. often play football 49. In a water polo game, players A. can't use their hands 50. Leo . A. isn't very fit

.

B. in a swimming pool

C. at the beach

B. badly

C. in a new competition

B. bounce the ball

C. doesn't kick the ball

. B. sometimes swim 30 metres

C. swim all the time

B. can swim quickly

C. likes playing individually

VIII. What do you say in these situations?

51. The class is very noisy when the teacher is away for a few minutes. You say, " ______________________________________________________________________________" 52. Nam watches too much television but doesn't play any sports. You say, " ______________________________________________________________________________" 53. The examinations are coming, but your classmate, Hung, doesn't study hard enough. You say, " ______________________________________________________________________________" 54. The pool is very deep, and it also has rocks. You say, " ______________________________________________________________________________" 55. Teasing wild animals is very dangerous. You say, " ______________________________________________________________________________" IX. Put the words in the correct order.

56. go/ do/ weekend/ on/ always/ fishing/ parents/ their?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 57. every/ play/ day/ badminton/ Lan/ does?  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 58. ________________________ now/ doing/ she/ aerobics/ is. _____________________________________________________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

59. children/ to/ movies/ do/ the/ how/ go/ the/ often?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 101

 

 

60. often/ video/ the/ games/ plays/ Nam/ afternoon/ in in..  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 61. a/ the/ sometimes/ students/ picnic/ have.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 62. camping/ they/ go/ do/ sometimes?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 63. usually/ his/ swimming/ with/ friends/ he/ goes.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 64. sailing/ my house/ my classmate Nam/ on the river/ last summer/ went/ with/ I/ near.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 65. your eyes/ swimming/ should/ when/ goggles/ you/ you/ go/ wear/ to protect  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ X. Make questions for the underlined part in each sentence.

66. The Olympics Games are held once every four years.  ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 67. The children are playing tug of war.  ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 68. The first Olympic Games took place in Greece in 776 BC.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 69. ________________________ Pelé began his career at the age_____________________________________________________ of 15.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 70. I really like swimming because it helps me keep k eep fit.  ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XI. There is ONE mistake in each sentence, try to find the mistake and correct it.

71. Unluckily, we won the game although we practised a lot.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 72. His team promise that they should win the match next summer.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ th 73. His favourite sport is table tennis, although his father will give him a racket for his 13  birthday.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 74. Can you say the difference between a sport and a game?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. In my spare time, I do judo ju do and play a lot of running.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XII. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.

76. My brother plays football very well. My brother is _________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________________________________. _______________________. 77. Mai likes playing badminton most. Badminton is _________________________ ____________________________________________________ __________________________________________________. _______________________. 78. Sports and games are very important in children's lives. Sports and games play ___________________________ ______________________________________________________ _________________________________________. ______________. 79. Children take part in many after-school a fter-school activities when school finishes.

Children do _____________________________________________________________________________. 80. Lan is very good at basketball. Lan can ________________________________________________________________________________.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 102

 

 

Unit 9:

CITIES OF THE WORLD

A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciati pronunciation on of the underlined part.

wardrobe well-known  judo robot nice  postcard most

II. 1.  2.  3.  4.  5. 

behind skyscraper high show poem height decide

design write diverse price motor slow minor

boat shy fine type sofa title right

pagoda only dry excited drive both role 

/əʊ/ 

/aɪ/ 

……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….  

………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ……………………………………………….  

Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. A. delicious B. like C. nice A. postcard B. home C. so A. show B. money C. robot A. find B. design C. typical A. wish B. high C. price

D. like D. come D. motor D. write D. mind

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Fill in the tables with the appropriate words or phrases in the box.

Cities

 New York  

London

 North America

Big Ben

The River Thames

the USA

Singapore

Christ the Redeemer

Tijuca Forest

Britain

 Europe

the Tower Bridge

South America

London Eye

 Brazil

Statue of Liberty

Maracana Stadium

Merlion

Sentosa

Houses of Parliament

Asia

Times Square

 Hyde Park

Empire State Building

Jurong Island

Central Park

Country

Continent

Places of interest

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 103

 

 

Rio de Janeiro 

Singapore 

II. Give the opposite of the adjectives, and then fill the superlatives of the opposites into the blanks. Adjective

Opposite

The superlative

new cheap small  bad cold unpopular dirty clean 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Sydney has beaches in the world. Big Ben is bell ever made in England. Sahara Desert is desert in the world. Beijing is city in China. Smoke from factories causes thick, gray smog in the atmosphere. The playwright William Shakespeare is British writer in the world. Oxford University is university in Britain. Melbourne in Australia is considered the world's city to live in. London is city in the world. The prices are very high there.

III. Tyler's friend, f riend, Mary, M ary, lives li ves in San Francisco Francis co now. Complete the th e sentences sentenc es about her new neighbourhood.

Dear Tyler, San Francisco is great, but it's really noisy. My M y neighbourhood isn't noisy - it's nice and very (1) Across the street is a park. Next to my apartment is a big small with a lot of (2) . Behind the mall is a small store with cool things. My school is really nice. It's very old. But inside, in side, the computers, desks and classrooms are (3) I'm really happy in San Francisco. But sometimes I'm (4) - I miss my friends a lot. Write soon!  Mary IV. Complete the sentences with the verbs in the present perfect.

read

not see

not study

take

1. The longest book I is The Lord of the Rings. 2. She the USA three times. Her aunt lives there. 3. I that film. Is it good?

visit

win 

4. I 5. They 6. My team

lots of photos with my camera. German before. This is their first year. ten matches this year.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 104

 

 

V. Put the verbs in brackets in the Present Perfect tense.

1. Peter and his brother (learn) English for three years. 2. Mr. Green (play) chess since eight o'clock. 3. It (not rain) since last week. 4. We (not see) our new teacher yet. 5. I (study) very hard for this examination. 6. My uncle (work) in this factory for ten years. 7. She (see) this film before. 8. The weather (be) quite good since Christmas. 9. I (have) this bike since I was a teenager, and I still use it. 10. He (play) for the football club for several years, but it's time to leave it now. VI. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct verb tense.

1. Be careful! The teacher (look) 2. The boy (learn) 3. How long (you/know) - I (know) 4. (she/feed) 5. We (not see)

at you. for three years, but he can't understand this letter. Paul? him for five years. the cat yet? Lan since we (be) on holiday last summer.

6. her homework 7. (she/finish) (your dog/ever bite) anyone?yet? - Yes, he (bite) the postman last month. 8. Would you like some coffee? I (just/ make) some. 9. (you/ ever be) to Ha Noi? 10. Our school performance (start) late last Sunday because of the heavy rain. VII. Read the passage and find the superlative form of these adjectives.

1. cold the coldest   2. bad __________________ 3. low _________________ 4. wet __________________ 5. dry _________________ 6. difficult _______________ Antarctica is the coldest place in the world and it has the worst weather. The lowest temperature on record is 0 -89 C. Antarctica is also the wettest and the driest place in the world. How is this possible? It's the wettest place  because 70 per cent of the world's fresh water is in Antarctica and 90 per cent of the world's ice. And it's the driest because in one place, the Dry Valleys, it never rains or snows. The Dry Valleys is the most difficult place in the world for plants and animals - nothing n othing can live or grow there. VIII. Write sentences using comparative and superlative forms of the adjectives.  Example:  Nancy/ old/ Mary, but Sarah …   Nancy is older than Mary, but Sarah is the oldest.

1. France/ hot/ Britain, but Spain …   __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Harry/ intelligent/ Paul, but Robert …   __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Magazines/ cheap/ books, but newspapers ...  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. History/ interesting/ science, but music … 

 __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ 5. Kate/ friendly/ Steve, but Wendy …   __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 105

 

 

IX. Complete the text with the correct form of the adjectives in brackets.

One of the (1. nice) cities I know is Olomouc in the Czech Republic. The (2. good) thing about the city is that there aren't many tourists. The (3. busy) times are when people go to work and come home gain. The (4. famous) place in the Czech Republic is Prague. It is the (5.  big) city and it is where most people go to. Olomouc is one of the (6. difficult)  places to get to from Prague so people visit other towns and cities nearer to Prague. That's why it's one of the (7. quiet) cities in the country. What's the (8. bad) thing about it? It's one of the (9. expensive) cities in the country. C. SPEAKING I. Complete the following short exchanges with the correct verb tense. Then practise them with your partner.

1. A: Have you ever (try) B: No, I 2. A: Have you ever (eat) B: Yes, I 3. A: Have you ever (see) B: Yes, I 4. A: Have you ever (be) B: Yes, I 5. A: (you/ have) B: Yes, I

spaghetti yet? , but I'd like to. at a Japanese restaurant? . The food was delicious. a real tiger? . I (see) one at the zoo last month. to a picnic at the beach? . It was fun. breakfast this morning? . I (eat) bread and eggs.

II. What have you done today? Tick or cross the activities in the table.  Example: "Have you taken a bus today?" - "Yes, I have./ No, I haven't." You

Your partner

do morning exercises take a bus watch TV use a computer send a text message listen to music  practise English visit a webpage III. Work with a partner. Ask and answer the questions.  Example: A: Have you met a famous person? B: Yes, I have. I've met…….. 

1. watch/ a volleyball match?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. win/ a competition?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. see/ a play?

 ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. see/ an action film?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 106

 

 

5. eat/ Chinese food?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. meet/ a famous person?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ IV. Write questions, using the superlative form of the adjectives. Then give your opinion, and practise the conversations with your partners.  Example: What/ beautiful/ place in the world?

What is the most beautiful place in the world?  I think … … is the most beautiful place in the world.

1. Who/ intelligent/ person in your your family?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What popular/ food in our country?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Who/ famous/ actor in our country?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. What/ important/ school subject?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. What/ boring/ sport?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ D. READING I. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text.

Tokyo, the capital of Japan, is a big city. The city is filled with factories, large office buildings. banks, restaurants, and shops of all sizes. It is a (1) for Japanese art, and is home to more than 100 colleges and universities. The city is (2) an important (3)place (4)main offices in Toky o. At the heart ofseaport. Tokyo Most is the Japanese Imperial companies Palace. Thishave is the the Tokyo. Emperor of Japan lives with his family. Tokyo is one of the world's biggest and most crowded (5) . 1.  A. house B. city C. center D. capital 2.  A. and B. also C. but D. so 3.  A. its B. their C. theirs D. some 4.  A. what B. where C. which D. for 5.  A. city B. a city C. cities D. the cities II. Read the passage, and then choose the correct answers.

San Francisco, a very hilly city, is in the San Francisco Bay. Although there are many modern skyscrapers in the city centre, houses in the suburbs are in the th

styles ofThe the celebration 19  century.of the Chinese New Year in San Francisco's Chinatown is one thing that you should not miss.

You can find the best food from around the world: Brazilian, Indian, Japanese, Korean, Mexican, Russian, Thai, Chinese and much more. Don't forget to visit a jazz club or an outdoor coffee shop to enjoy good coffee and fresh air. You should visit Mission Dolores, an old church built by the Spanish in the 18th century.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 107

 

 

1. Which of the following sentences is true about San Francisco? A. San Francisco is not a very hilly city. B. San Francisco is not in the San Francisco Bay. C. San Francisco has only old houses. D. San Francisco is a city cit y with modern skyscrapers in the city centre. 2. What is second paragraph about? A. nightlife B. festivals C. scenery D. architecture 3. Where can we have coffee and enjoy fresh fresh air? A. Chinatown B. Old houses C. Churches D. Outdoor coffee shops 4. Which of the following sentences is NOT true about San Francisco? Francisco? A. San Francisco is in the San Francisco Bay. B. The celebration of the Chinese New Year in San Francisco's Chinatown is very interesting. C. You can only enjoy American and Chinese food in San Francisco. D. You should enjoy jazz at a jazz club in San Francisco. 5. By whom was Mission Mission Dolores built in the 18th century? A. By people from Germany. B. By people from Spain. C. By people from Brazil. D. By people from Europe. III. Read the articles arti cles about the favourite Saturday activity activ ity of some students, s tudents, and then answer the questions.

 A. C arlo rloss - R io de J ane neii ro, B raz razii l. Go to Ipanema Beach. Play volleyball or go swimming in the Atlantic Ocean. Look at the people. Everybody is happy. It's my favourite place. B . M i ch chii ko - Tokyo Tokyo,, Ja J apan. Go to a department store in Shibuya. Shibuya is a great shopping area in Tokyo. Sometimes it's very crowded, but that's OK - I love shopping. shopp ing. C. L i se - Pa Parr is, Fr F r anc nce e. Go to the Eiffel Tower. It's really tall. Look at the river and the beautiful buildings. The view of Paris is great. D . J aso son n - New New Y or k Cit Ci ty, USA . Go to the skating rink in Central Park. Look at the ice-skaters. They're The y're good! Or, go skating. It's really fun.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Is Shibuya in Paris? Are the ice-skaters in Central Park good? What is the name of Carlos's favourite place? Is Michiko a shopping fan? Where is Carlos from? Is the Eiffel Tower in France? Is Central Park in Tokyo?

__________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________

IV. Read the texts below and match them to the correct corr ect city and the state, writing wri ting the answer (A-D) (A -D) in each blank.

A. New York, New York State B. St. Louis, Missouri C. Pasadena, California D. Huntsville, Alabama  ______ 1. Hi. How's it going? My name's Joe. I live in Missouri. The Gateway Arch is in my state. It's 200 metres high. You can get an elevator to the top. It's amazing.

4 43.5 metres high. It has 73 elevators and 6,500 windows.  ______ 2. Hi, I'm Sarah. My favourite landmark is 443.5 There is a fantastic view of the city from the top floor. Can you guess what it is? It's the Empire State Building, of course.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 108

 

 

 ______ 3. Hi, my name's Tania and I want to be an astronaut. I'm from Alabama so I often visit the Space and Rocket Centre here. My favourite landmark is the Apollo 11 Launch Vehicle. In 1969, Neil Armstrong travelled to the moon in Apollo 11. 11 .  ______ 4. Hi, my name's Mark. I'm a big football fan from California. My favourite landmark is the Pasadena Rose Bowl. Every year, they hold college football games here. V. Read the postcard and answer the questions.

Dear Jack, frombutNew York! Wea got there after five-hour delay because we I'd missed Washington. is veryHicold, we are doing lot of sightseeing so that helps! Sometimes preferour to flight stay ininmy hotel room,Itbut you can't come to New York and stay inside! There's a little Italian place next to the hotel. We go there every morning for breakfast. Mum has a double espresso and a piece of cake and my dad has a full American  breakfast. Ugggh! Far too much for me. I just have coffee!  New York is wonderful - really! I love the skyscrapers! Hope you are well. Tom

1. Why did Tom get to New York five five hours late?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What is the weather like?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Where do they have breakfast?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. What does Tom have for breakfast?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. What does Tom like like about New York?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VI. Match each text to the correct postcard. A. Come to Scotland B. A trip to London C. Normandy, France   Hi, Maria,

We're having a great time. The weather here isn't nice, but the rest is really great. Tomorrow we're going to have a party with the boys from France on the beach, and on Friday we're going to go sightseeing. Are you going to see Marca on Saturday? If so, say hello to him from me. Love,  Jenny    Hi Tom, I saw Brad Pitt yesterday. I know you're not going to believe me, but it's true. I read in the newspaper they're going to make a horror film here in Edinburgh, and he's in it. And guess what! I took a photo of him and I'm going to show it to you, because you never believe me! (I'm going to give it to Lisa!) See you soon!  Roland    

Dear Sir, We're having a good time. Tomorrow we're going to visit the Tower and St Paul's, and in the evening we're

going to see a play by Shakespeare. Dan says it's going to be very boring, but I don't think so. We like everything here - it's so English.  Paolo and Gianni  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 109

 

 

1. What is Jenny going to do on Friday? Friday?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What is Brad Pitt doing in Edinburgh?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Why is Roland not going to show the photograph to Tom?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Who is he going to give the photograph to?  ________________________ _____________________________________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. What are are Paolo and Gianni going to to see?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. Who do you think they are writing writing to? to?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ VII. Read the passage and then answer the questions.

Outt and Ou and abo about ut in i n L ond ondon on 1. M useum useumss and galle allerr i es. Visit Madame Tussauds and see models of the world's most famous people, including all your favourite actors and singers. There are some great museums. Don't miss Egyptian mummies at the British Museum or the dinosaurs at the Natural History Museum. Do you like modern? Then visit the Tate Modern with many modern collections of pictures and photos.  2. I nt nte er est stii ng build uildii ngs The Tower of London is over 900 years old and for a long time it was a prison. After the Tower, take a boat trip down the river to St Paul's Cathedral, and then take a ride on the London Eye. There are fantastic views from the top.  3. Sho Shop ppi ng There are lots of fantastic shops in London. Walk down Oxford Street, or visit one of the lively street markets, where everything is cheap! 4. N i ght lilife fe

There are lots of exciting things to do in the evening. The West End is full of theatres, cinemas, and great restaurants. There are all kinds of concerts every night n ight –  rock,  rock, classical, pop, jazz...  5. Sp Spo or t and le leii su sure re Relax and walk in Hype Park - it's clean and safe. Do you like football? Then go and see Chelsea play at Stamford Bridge. If you prefer tennis, there's Wimbledon in June. Where can you….  1. relax and walk? ________________________ 2. watch Chelsea play? ________________________ 3. see models of famous people? ________________________ 4. look at modern art? ________________________ 5. watch tennis? 6. find lots of theatres?

________________________ ________________________

7. find cheap things to buy? 8. enjoy wonderful views of the city?

________________________ ________________________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 110

 

 

E. WRITING I. Read each postcard and then answer the questions for each.

Hi Susan, We're in Mallorca. It's lovely here and the weather is fantastic. We're at a campsite in a small village. This is a picture of the beach near the campsite. We go swimming every morning and Kate goes sailing in the afternoon, too. Wish you were here! Love Dan& Kate Dear Mark, We're in Scotland. It's great here, but the weather isn't very good. We're in a youth hostel near Loch Ness. Do you know Loch Ness? It's famous for the monster! This is a picture of the loch ('Loch' means 'lake'.) There are lots of lovely mountains all round. We go walking in the mountains every e very day. See you next week. Bye for now Sally  1. Where are they?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What do they think of the place?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. What is the weather like?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Where are they staying (hotel, campsite, etc.)?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. What do they do every day?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ II. Write a postcard (50-70 words) to a friend. Use the writing guide to help you.

           

Start with Dear … or Hi…  Say where you are. Say what the place is like and what the weather is like. Say what type of housing you are staying in. Say what you do every day. Finish with Love or Bye for now and your name  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________      

 _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 111

 

 

TEST (UNIT 9) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. beach B. speak C. hear 2.  A. city B. fish C. dish 3.  A. tower B. show C. slow 4.  A. postcard B. fantastic C. visit

D. clean D. high D. motor D. fast

5.  A. continent

D. coffee

B. photo

C. popular

II. 6.  7.  8.  9. 

Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. A. peaceful B. beautiful C. noise A. Africa B. Sweden C. American A. clock B. tower C. bell A. fantastic B. beautiful C. boring 10. A. tea B. fish and chips C. television

D. delicious D. Asia D. lion D. wonderful D. sandwich

III. Choose the correct answers.

11. Have you ever   A. be

to London?  London?  B. being

C. been

D. gone

12. People in Tokyo are very polite  polite  friendly friendly.. A. or B. and C. but D. so drink in Viet Nam? 13. Do you know  know  popular   A.  popular  B. more popular   C. more and more popular   D. the most popular   cakes   a coffee shop the Old Town Town.. 14. When we were in Stockholm, we had coffee and cakes A. on - on B. at - at at   C. in - in D. on - at  at  15. The Eiffel Tower is the most  most   landmark in the world. world. visiting   visited   visit  A. visit B. . visiting C. visited D. to visit  16. Britain's most common  common  activities are watching TV and films, and listening to the radio radio.. B. leisure leisure   C. good good   D. popular   popular   A. free  free  17. "I Trang have been to Nha Trang    A. one B. two

. How about you?" times  C. two times 

twice  D. twice 

18. Do you have  have  in Da Lat during your ho holiday? liday?   A. time  time  B. good time time   C. good a time time   D. a good time  time   Nha Trang has an  atmosphere of a young, city.. city 19. Nha 19. an  A. exciting - growing  growing  B. excited - grown grown   C. exciting - grown grown   D. excited - growing  growing  its fashion shops shops.. 20. That city is most famous  famous  A. to B. with C. for D. of 21. My family had a lot of   in Hoi An and it was an exciting trip. trip. A. fun  fun  B. funny funny   C. enjoy B  B  D. enjoys  enjoys  22. International School in Ho Chi Minh City is is   school in Viet Nam with high-tech facilities. facilities. A. the oldest      23. Has hot  B. the younger  ouroldest city  been hot   before?  before?  A. as this  this  B. as this time time  

C. the most historic historic  

D. the most modern  modern 

C. like time time  

D. like this time  time 

24. People must be well-prepared  well-prepared  until   A. after B. until

they want to climb Mount Everest. Everest . although   C. although D. before

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 112

 

 

25. "Which "Which   is Britain in?" - "Europe" "Europe"   country  continent   city   area   A. country  B. continent C. city D. area famous  . 26. The red double-decker bus is  is London's famous  A. sign B. signal signal   C. symbol symbol   D. logo  logo  27. Nha 27.  Nha Trang is also considered Viet Nam's Nam's   seaside resort town. town. famous   visiting   famous  famous  B. most famous C. most visiting D. the most famous  A. more famous  all.. 28. I Da Lat three times in all A. visit  visit  B. visited visited   C. visiting visiting   D. have visited  visited  a 3D film. 29. This is the first time that I watched   watched   D. have never watched  watched  watch  B. watched C. have ever watched A. watch  30. . I think it is a very nice town  town   the weather is good and the people are friendly. friendly. A. because B. if C. so  so  D. although  although  IV. Complete the sentences, using the present perfect form of the verbs.  Example: "Is David still here?" - "No, he (go) has gone home."

31. "Is it raining?" - "No, it (stop) ." 32. "Are Mary and Susan here?" - "Yes, they (arrive) 33. "Do you want a drink?" - "No, thanks. I (have) 34. "Does Kate bring her cellphone with her?" - "Yes, I (speak) 35. "Is Daniel watching TV?" - "No, he (finish)

." one." to her." ."

V. Match the questions with the answers, and write the answer in each blank. Questions

36. What is the weather in Nha Trang like? 37. What do you think about the local people? 38. What have Nam and Hoa done? 39. What will Mai do tomorrow? 40. Is the weather here hotter than in Singapore?

Answers

a) They are very friendly. b) I think they are the same. c) She'll visit the Big Ben. d) The sun is shining all the time. e) They have visited the Old Quarter.

VI. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text.

Sydney is the (41)

of the state New South Wales in Australia. It is the largest, oldest, and perhaps

the (42)in the world, beautiful city in (43) Australia. Sydney has a population million. Its Harbour is one of city the largest and famous the Harbour Bridge and of the4.5 Opera House. The streets in the centre are narrow (44) many art galleries, restaurants, pubs, but the streets in Paddington are (45) and houses are big. 1.  A. home B. site C. capital D. village 2.  A. more B. most C. less D. fewer 3.  A. with B. for C. in D. at 4.  A. on B. at C. to D. with 5.  A. narrow B. short C. long D. wide VII. Read the passage, and then choose the correct answers.

Tokyo is the capital of Japan. In Tokyo, there are always too many people in the place where you want to come. People are very polite even when they often spend a long time on traffic jams. Tokyo is different from London when you want to walk to a place.

During the day, most people travel to work by train. Tokyo people buy six million train tickets every day. Although they are usually crowded, Japanese trains are very good. They always leave and arrive on time. On a London train, everybody in a seat seems to be asleep whether the journey is long or short.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 113

 

 

The worst time to be in the street at night is about 11.30 when the nightclubs are closing and everybody wants to go home. 46. Tokyo is different from London because . A. it has a larger population B. it is a noisy city C. it is more difficult to walk to somewhere D. its people are friendly and more polite p olite 47. When does the writer think the worst time to go into the street? A. When the nightclubs are closing. B. At 8.00 am. C. When the trains are full. D. At 11.30 am 48. What does the writer think of Japanese trains? A. They are very nice and comfortable. B. There are not enough trains. C. They often run late. D. They leave and arrive on time. 49. In London trains, every British in a seat . A. reads a newspaper B. looks like being asleep C. talks with other people D. looks out of the window. 50. Which statement is NOT true according to the th e passage? A. Most people in Tokyo travel to work by train. B. It is very difficult to go around in Tokyo. Tok yo. C. When Japanese people are on traffic jams, they are not polite. D. Trains in Tokyo are very good - they always leave and arrive on time. VIII. Make questions for the underlined part in each sentence.

51. London is on the River Thames.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 52. The Eiffel Tower first opened on 6 th May 1889.  ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 53. We are going to visit the Empire State Building tomorrow.  ________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 54. I went to London in my last vacation.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 55. The weather in London was very cloudy and wind.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ IX. There is ONE mistake in each sentence, try to find the mistake and correct it.

56. The Royal Palace is one of the largest palace in Europe.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 57. "Have you ever eat Ha Noi Pho, Steven?"  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 58. Up to now, I have visited Da Lat third times.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 59. Do you think the most popular Vietnamese writer of children is To Hoai?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 60. Sydney Opera House is an UNESCO World Heritage building.  __________________________________________________ __________ 61. ________________________ The Merlion is a creature with_____________________________________________________ the head of a lion so the body of_____________________________________ a fish.

 ________________________ _____________________________________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 62. New York is an excited city with many skyscrapers.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 114

 

 

63. You can play boating on the West Lake and it is very nice.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 64. I have been to the beaches in Nha Trang many time with my family.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 65. Is Chicago or Los Angeles the two biggest city in the United States?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ X. Put the words in the correct order.

66. from/ vacation/ come/ Nha Trang/ I/ just have/ a/ back/ in.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 67. university/ Viet Nam/ the/ was/ Quoc Tu Giam/ first/ in.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 68. world/ six/ in/ are/ continents/ there/ the.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 69. England/ tower/ it/ famous/ in/ the/ is/ most.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 70. years/ new/ building/ is/ but/ looks/ 100/ 10 0/ more than/ old/ the/ it.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XI. Write correct sentences, using the words or phrases given.

71. Da Nang/ attract/ lots/ tourists/ because/ it/ most beautiful/ beaches/ Viet Nam.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 72. Hoi An/ famous/ old houses and buildings/ traditional crafts.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 73. You/ see/ latest Batman film?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 74. Temple of Literature/ one/ Ha Noi's/ famous/ landmarks.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. Merlion/ lion's head/ fish's body/ symbol/ Singapore.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ XII. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.

76. In Viet Nam, April is hotter than any an y other months of the year. In Viet Nam, April is ________________________ __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________. ___________________. 77. Do you think money is more important than any other things in the world? Do you think money is ____________________________________________________________________. 78. My father thinks Brazil has a football team better b etter than any other football teams in the world. My father thinks Brazil has ___________________________ ______________________________________________________ _____________________________________. __________. 79. New York is more exciting than any other cities in the world.  New York is __________________________ _____________________________________________________ __________________________________________________. _______________________. 80. Nha Trang attracts lots of tourists. It has clean and beautiful beaches. Because _______________________________________________________________________________.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 115

 

 

TEST YOURSELF 3 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. with B. breathe C. they 2.  A. show B. snow C. now 3.  A. care B. share C. prepare 4.  A. fear B. near C. hear 5.  A. like B. bit C. bite

D. truth D. slow D. career D. bear D. kind

II. Choose the correct answers.

6. I often fishing with my uncle at the weekend weekend.. go   play  make  A. do B. go C.  play  D. make   beautiful place in the world. world. 7. Our hometown is  is  A. more  more  B. more and more  more  C. the most most   D. the more and more  more  more    because there is more smoke from factories and motor engines engines.. 8. The atmosphere is getting more pollute  polluting   polluted   pollution  A.  pollute  B.  polluting  C. polluted  D. pollution  is the longest river in the world?" - "I think it's the Nile River." 9. "  A. Which Which   B. Where Where   C. How How   D. Why  Why  10. "I have been to Singapore  Singapore  . How about you?"  you?"  C. twice D. twice times B. two times times   twice   times   doing morning exercises is good for your health, don't do it too hard. hard . A. Although B. If C. But D. When drink in Viet Nam is tea. 12. The tea. B. more and more popular   A. more popular   delicious  C. delicious  D. most popular   13. I have been  been  many beautiful places in Viet Nam. Nam . A. at B. on C. in D. to to Ha Noi in 2010 2010.. 14. I first  first  A. was B. went C. have been D. have gone 15. "I'd like to change the  the  . Please give me the remote control." control."  

11.

A. two

B. view C. channel  D. television  A.  programme  view    is on  television  programme want to  know which film on tonight, check channel  the TV  TV  . 16. If you A.  programme  programme  B. schedule schedule   C. news D. information  information   because they make them laugh a lot. lot. 17. Most children like  like  films  stories  comedies  documentaries  A. films  B. love stories  C. comedies  D. documentaries  18. Let's Learn is a TV programme for small  small  children which makes education . funny   C. enjoy  enjoy  D. enjoyed A. fun B. funny 19. Watching too much TV is not good for your health  health  it hurts your eyes eyes.. so  and   because  A. so  B. but C. and  D. because  20. "Do you  you  your TV on when you are not watching it? "  "  A. take B. leave C. get D. make

21. "It's to  cold outside. Remember to  A. wear B. put off

warm clothes clothes. C. put ." 

D. get

22.

are the Olympic Games held? held?   long   often   How  B. How long C. How often A. How  to any school clubs, Nam?" Nam?"   23. "Do you  you  A.  belong  belong  B. play   play  C. do  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

much  D. How much  D. going  Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 116

 

 

III. Complete III.  Complete the story with the Past Simple form of the verbs in brackets.

It (24. be) a sunny day. Helen (25. walk) to the park. In the park she (26.  phone) her friend Daisy. Helen (27. wait) for 15 minutes and Daisy (28. arrive) . The girls (29. walk) to the river. There (30. be) two boys there. Suddenly the big boy (31. push) the small boy into the river. Helen (32. jump) into the river to rescue the boy. Daisy (33. phone) the ambulance and the police. The doctors and police (34. arrive) . They (35. interview) the girls. sent nt Pe P er fect  or  Sim mple Pa Past  st  of the verbs in brackets. IV. Complete the dialogue with the P r ese  or the Si Minh:  I (36. just, hear) that Hung is in Australia. Oh, (37. You/ not know) that? He (38. fly) Mai:  Minh: Mai: 

there at the beginning of the month. (39. you/ hear) from him? Does he like the life there? Yes, I (40. get) a letter last week. He (41. tell) me about his study. But he (42. not say) whether he (43. like) the life or not. Perhaps it's too early to say. He (44. be) there for only three weeks. He (45. never/ be) to a foreign country before.

V. Complete the dialogue. Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets.  Nam:  Hi My name's Nam.  Peter:  Hello. Nice to meet you, Nam. I'm Peter.  Nam:  Are you a newcomer here?  Peter:  Yes. I (46. be) here since last week.  Nam:  I'm sure you'll love this place.  Peter:  I (47. hope) so. How long (48. you/ live) here?  Nam:  For 15 years.  Peter:  So you must know the area very well. (49. be) there a post office near here?  Nam:  Yes. There (50. be) one next to my house. Why?  Peter:  Because I (51. want) to send this postcard to my family.  Nam:  Oh! It (52. look) very beautiful. Where (53. be) your family?  Peter:  In London. (54. you/ ever be) there, Nam?  Nam:  Not yet. But I (55. go) there with my father next summer holiday.  Peter:  That's great. I hope to see you again there. VI. Match the questions with the answers, and write the answer in each blank. Questions

Answers

56. What's your favorite program? 57. Why don't you watch some news programs? 58. What about plays? 59. Was there anything good on TV last night? 60. What was it about? 61. What was so special about it? 62. Really? What time was it on?

a. Because they're usually boring.  b. Film shows. c. From seven to eight. d. Yes, it's going to be shown again. e. Yes, there was an interesting nature  program. f. The news and the sports shows.

63. to I'msee sorry about them either. it? I missed it. Is there another chance g. h. IItdon't wascare about monkeys and the way they live.

64. Which program do you prefer, the news or the film show? i. Oh, the film show, not the news. 65. What would you like to watch on TV?  j. It was so interesting and the pictures .  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 117

 

 

VII. Read the passage, and then decide whether the sentences are True or F als lse e.

When Ana lived in Brazil, she joined a riding club. It was brilliant! She learned how to ride and how to look after a horse. Now she lives in the US and there isn't a club in her village but it isn't a problem. Her friend lives on a farm and she has two horses, so twice a week (Wednesdays and Fridays) after school she goes there to ride with her friend. Ana thinks she's lucky! 66. Ana learned to ride in the US. ____________ 67. She also learned how to take care of horses. ____________ 68. The village in the US where she lives does not have a riding club. 69. Ana lives on a farm. 70. Ana rides horses at the weekend.

____________ ____________ ____________

VIII. Read the text, and answer the questions below.

In the 1970s, skateboarding suddenly became very popular. At first, skateboarders move slowly on flat, smooth area. Then they began to ride quickly. This is called 'freestyle' skateboarding. Soon they were skateboarding skillfully up ramps and doing tricks in the air. This is called 'ramp' skateboarding. Then they started skateboarding and doing tricks on the street. This was 'street-style' skateboarding  –   a combination of freestyle and ramp. For this, the skateboarders needed protective clothing such as knee and elbow pads and helmets. This allowed them to skateboard safely. Today skateboarding is still a very popular sport, and there are lots of competitions 71. ________________________ When did skateboarding become very popular?  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 72. What are the three styles of skateboarding?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 73. What was 'street-style' skateboarding?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 74. Why do 'street-style' skateboarders need protective clothing?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. Do you think skateboarding is a very popular sport now? Why or why not?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ IX. Write correct sentences, using the words or phrases given.

76. I/ take part/ swimming competition/ school/ last week/ and/ win/ third prize.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. I/ can't/ soccer /classmates/ this afternoon/ because/ I/ visit/ my grandmother/ hospital.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. I/ should/ finish/ homework/ before/ play/ sports.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. Soccer/ or football/ most/ popular sport/ Viet Nam.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 118

 

 

Unit 10:

OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE

A. PHONETICS Complete the words with the letters "dr" or "tr". Put the words in the correct column.

 ______ess  ______avel  ______ousers coun __yside  ______lamp

s _____ess ______ain ______ee ______aw

chil___en ______aw ______ip ______y

______actor ______eam ______iver ______ink

/dr/

/tr/

……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….  

………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………  

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Fill in each blank with a suitable phrase from the box. modern fridge wireless TV

hi-tech robots

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

dishwasher

smart washing machine

We will use a A

to wash all the dishes and containers after a meal. will wash dirty clothes and make them ready for you to put on. will understand what we say and will do all things around the house. We will watch TV programmes from other countries by using . Do you think will choose suitable food for our meals?

II. Complete the sentences with the verbs from the box in the correct form with "will". 

be

do

drive

go

grow

listen

like

speak

wear

win

In the year 2040… 

l. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

people we people robots families the world we

on Mars. flying cars. computers in their clothes. all our homework. food in their homes. a clean and happy place. every language in the world by using special computers.

8. the USA 9. young people 10. some people

the football World Cup. to strange music. to the Moon for their holidays.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 119

 

 

III. Complete the sentences. The first has been done for you as an example.  Example:  A: In 20 years' time, I'll have a big house. (No, palace.) B: No, you won't. You'll have a palace! 1. A: In ten years' time, you'll be my assistant. (No, manager.) B: ____________________________________ 2. A: In five years time, I'll be a poor artist. (No, rich and famous.) B: ____________________________________ 3. A: Jack will pass all his exams this year. (No, most of) B:_____________________________________ 4. A: Peter will play for England one day. (No, Wales) B:_____________________________________ 5. A: In 50 years, this school will have 2,000 students. (No, everyone will study at home.) B:_____________________________________ IV. Write a question with "will" for each situation, using the words given in brackets.  Example:  I will paint something this afternoon. (What/ you/ paint?) paint?) What will you paint this afternoon?

1. Mrs. Roberts will go shopping. shopping. (What/ she/ buy?)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2.  ________________________ They are meeting Paul at the station. (When/ he/ arrive?) arrive?)  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. We won't have a meeting on Thursday. (When/ you/ have a meeting?)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. We will go to the cinema. (What/ you/ see?)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. My grandparents will go to Ha Noi this summer. (How/ (How/ they/ travel?) travel?)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. I have just bought some posters. posters. (Where/ (Where/ you/ put them?)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. My grandparents will come for dinner tonight. (What/ you/ cook?)  ________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8.  __________________________________________________ My brother will learn learn a foreign_____________________________________________________ language. (What language/ he learn?) lear n?)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. It's my birthday next week. (Where/ you/ have/ birthday's party?)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 10. I am too busy to paint the door. (When/ you/ paint/it?)  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ V. Complete the sentences with might  or  or might not .

1. I'm tired. I go to bed early tonight. 2. He left the office very late so he be home for dinner. 3. There are a lot of clouds in the sky so it rain later. 4. She didn't pass her driving test so she 5. They're a very good team. They

be happy. win the championship this year.

VI. Match the two halves of the sentence. Write the answers in the left blanks.

 ______ 1. It might rain  ______ 2. I have a headache

a. and I might say 'yes'. b. so I might not eat anything.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 120

 

 

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

3. I need a new dress 4. I quite like Kaiser Chiefs 5. I drank a lot of coffee this morning 6. I don't feel very hungry 7. I've seen this film 8. He asked me to marry him

c. so I might not go to the party. d. so I might go shopping tomorrow. e. so take a coat. f. and I might not want to see it again. g. and I might buy their new CD. h. so I might not sleep well tonight.

VII. Choose the correct word.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

I'll leave early so will/ won't  be  be late. He's faster faster than me so I don't think I will/ won 't  win  win the race. It will/ won't  be  be cold so take a warm coat. It's a secret so promise you will/ won't  tell  tell anyone. It's his first day at school so he will/ won't  know  know anybody. I'll get the news tomorrow so so I will/ won't  phone  phone and tell you. She's intelligent. She will/ won't  be  be a scientist one day. The sky's really blue blue so I don't think it will/ won't  rain  rain this afternoon.

C. SPEAKING Complete the conversation with suitable phrases. A: Will you live in a hi-tech house? B: Yes, I think so. our houses in the future? A: (1) . B:  I think they will be (2)

A: Is it friendly to the environment? B: Yes, that's right. It will only use (3) so that we can keep the environment clean. A: What about the appliances? B: The Internet TV helps us to watch(4) . A: Will you have any robots in your house? B: Well, Robots will (5) , so we will have more time for our family and relax. D. READING I. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text.

Our future house will be on the ocean. It will be surrounded by tall trees and blue sea. But we only have salt water in the ocean. We needs fresh water for (l) and for growing food (2) farms. Ocean water is too salty (3) . It is also too salty for watering plants. We must have the (4) to make fresh water from salty water. We should be (5) not to waste water. 1.  A. drink B. to drink C. drinking D. to drinking 2.  A. on B. at C. in D. into 3.  A. drink B. to drink C. drinking D. for drink 4.  A. things B. suggestions C. ways D. ideas 5.  A. careful B. careless C. carefully D. carelessly II. Read the passage carefully, carefully, and then choose the correct answers. MY DREAM SCHOOL

In the future, schools will be better. Computers will be much quicker and we might have pencils which write for us! All the students will have their own computers.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 121

 

 

When there is a history lesson, the computers will show important events. The students will be dressed up as the characters from the period they are studying. There will be hover boards in the playground, and students will come to school by hover cars. Every child will have a robot like themselves. The robots will have to go to school while the students sit at home controlling them in front of their computers. The robots will have laser pens and the student will have laser ink pens. The classroom will be floating, and the tables and chairs will, too. There will be no homework, and teachers won't take away the toys. 1. Th The e student wants all of the following but not . A. having laser ink pens B. going to school C. staying at home controlling a robot D. having a robot like himself 2. In history lessons, the student wants the computer to . A. show important people in history events B. have new games C. show history events and the student will be one of the important characters ch aracters D. find all information about the events from the Internet 3. If the history lesson today is about ancient Egypt, the student will . A. watch films about Egypt on the computer B. become the queen C. get dressed like the queen D. see things and houses at that time

4. The student wants to have . A. floating classrooms C. toys in the classroom 5. The word "hover" in paragraph 2 means A. colourful B. flying

B. no homework D. all A, B, and C

. C. moving

D. large

III. Read the text and match the machines (1-6) with w ith the things they do (a-i). Three machines machin es match with two things.

 My dr eam sma smar t hom home …  When I go to bed, the smart bed automatically gets warm. When I am asleep, it controls the temperature. In the morning, when I wake up, my robots makes me a cup of tea. I drink the tea in bed and then get up. The bathroom has a smart shower. When my sister is in the shower, it stops after five minutes and says to her, "Your brother wants to use the bathroom now." The smart mirror says nice things to me like, "Your hair is great today!" The kitchen has a smart fridge. It orders food from the Internet. My smart fridge orders food for all my family and it knows our favourite food. It talks to my family. It says, "Don't eat that, it's John's!" The living room: The smart TV knows what I like and it finds things that I want to watch. It doesn't listen to other people. d og. It gives him food and it takes him out for exercise. My smart robot: My smart robot looks after the dog. The bedroom:

1. Smart bed 2. Smart mirror

____________ ____________

a. It orders our food. b. It speaks to my sister

3. Smart shower 4. Smart fridge 5. Smart TV

____________ ____________ ____________

c. It looks after my dog. d. It controls the temperature e. It speaks to me.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 122

 

 

6. Smart robot

____________

f. It stops after five minutes. g. It doesn't listen to other people. h. It makes me a cup of tea. i. It speaks to my family.

IV. Read the text, and then answer the questions.

I magi ne the futur future e......  In 20 years, every thing will be different. Computers will talk to all the machines machine s in our kitchen. Fridges will

have computers, too. Youwhat won'tfood go totothe supermarket buytalk food. will tell the fridge what you want eat and the fridge will know buy. Your fridgetowill toYou the computer at the supermarket. Aftertothat, the food will arrive at your house. How will it come? It won't be quick. A teenager will cycle to your house with your food! Will you know what will happen in the future? No one really knows, kno ws, but it's great to imagine! 1. When will everything be different?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What will computers do in the kitchen?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. What will fridges have in the future?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Why don't we need to go to the supermarket to get food?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. How can food food arrive arrive at our house? house?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ E. WRITING ill"  " , using the words or phrases given. Write sentences with " will

l. Students/ class 6A/ plant/ some trees/ school yard/ tomorrow morning.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Tourists/ stop/ restaurant/ a short time.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. My children/ spend/ their holiday/ a farm.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. My mother/ prepare/ food/ my birthday party/ next week.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Hoa/ see/ her parents/ the country.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 6. They/ have/ an important test/ Friday.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 7. Workers/ build/ more more bridges/ this area.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 8. They/ travel/ Ha Noi/ by air.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 9. They/ cut down/ some trees/ schoolyard.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

10. It/ rain/ soon.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 123

 

 

TEST (UNIT 10) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. living B. wireless C. hi-tech 2.  A. robot B. go C. no 3.  A. space B. located C. lake 4.  A. machine B. cheap C. watch

D. nice D. not D. cottage D. children

5.  A. surround

D. house

B. ocean

C. space

Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud.   A. palace B. houseboat C. motorhome A. control B. start C. run A. telephone B. robot C. dishwasher A. surf B. Internet C. email 10. A. fantastic B. exciting C. interesting

II. 6.  7.  8.  9. 

D. kitchen D. engine D. travel D. sea D. boring

III. Choose the correct answers. 

11. Super cars will  will  by  A. go by 

water in the future. future. at   B. run at

on   C. run on

by  D. travel by 

12. The robot will  will  of the flowers in the garden garden..  A. take care care   B. take note note   C. be  be careful  careful  D. carry  carry  to  the e-mails e-mails.. 13. The house will have a super smart TV to  post  receive   take  get  A. send and post  B. . send and receive C. get and take  D. receive and get  14.  pencils and paper, every student will have a computer   .. Instead   C. Instead of   D. At A. By B. Instead 15. We might have a  a  TV to watch TV programmes from space space.. A. wireless  wireless  B. remote remote   C. automatic automatic   D. local  local  16. I would like to have my house by  by  . so we can see the beach from my window window   mountains  city   sea   countryside  A. the mountains  B. the city C. the sea D. the countryside  children while we are away. away. 17. A hi-tech robot will help us  us   A. look out  B. look at out  at   18. We might have robots  robots  A. cook   B. to cook   19. I might have a smart phone A. surf B. to surf   20. We also watch films A. in B. at 21. "Do you think we will  will   A. go B. go on 22. "Will you have a car   A. it B. this

our meals meals..

C. look after  

D. look in  in 

cooking   C. cooking

cooking  D. to cooking 

the Internet Internet.. C. surfing surfing   smart phones. phones.   C. on holiday to the Moon?" Moon?"   C. go on the can fly into space?" space?"   C. what

23. We will use special cards to  to  start   stop   A. open - stop  B. open - start

D. to surfing  surfing  D. to D. go for D. that

the doors and the engine..D. drive - start  stop    engine start  C. control - stop

24. "Do you think that our houses will be be   A. in B. on  Our future houses will use  25. Our 25. use 

space?" space?"   C. at D. to energy, and they they  are very friendly to the environment. environment.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 124

 

 

A. sun

sunny   B. sunny

C. solar  

D. lunar  

26. We will have more robots  robots   they can help us do housework and protect our houses. houses. A. so B. because C. so that D. although goods from the supermarket. supermarket. 27. A super smart TV will help us  us   A. take take   B.  buy  buy  C. carry D. order   garden   the flowers and the dogs and cats cats.. 28. We will have a robot in the garden feed   take   wash  take  B. water - feed C. feed - take D. water - to wash  A. cut - take  29. With a smart watch, you will  will   your friends in other countries countries.. B. talk C. say  say  D. contact  contact  A. speak   the floors, meals and so on on.. 30. Robots will help us do the housework such as  as  cooking   D. cleaning - to cook   B. to clean - to cook   C. cleaning - cooking A. clean - cook   IV. Fill in each blank with ONE word.  

31. My future house will have a sea so we can see the beach from my window. 32. "Can you tell me about your house in the future?" 33. My future house will be on the sea, and we can use and energy. 34. "Where will your future house ?" 35. Instead of taking pictures with our cameras, we will take pictures with our . 36. "Will you have a lot of trees and flowers your house?" 37. wireless TV will help us watchall TVof the energy it from space. 38. A Our future house should produce 39. People might watch films smart phones. 40. We can change the rooms very quickly so that we can

. new technology.

V. Complete the following sentences with "will", using the verbs given in the box.

41. I 42. We 43. He 44. Tom 45. I 46. She 47. We 48. They 49. They 50. She

borrow

have

wear

give

visit

invite

play

buy

write

see

some close friends to my birthday party. a play at the ABC Theater. chess in the Youth Club. some bread at the baker's. some books from the library. a letter to her friend. our grandparents next weekend. their children toys at Christmas. their holiday in Vung Tau. a blue dress at her sister's wedding.

VI. Complete the conversation with appropriate words or phrases. A  Which type of house would you like (51) in the future? B Well, maybe a hi-tech house on the ocean. It will be (52) A B

How canproduce you produce We can all theelectricity? energy because we can use (53)

by tall trees and blue sea. .

A B  A 

It will be very friendly to the environment. How can you go to school? There will be a helicopter on the roof so that (54) Can you you control your house when you're away?  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

.

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 125

 

 

B  A B A B A B

Yes, we can have our smart phones (55) our cooker, and robots (56) such as cleaning the floors, watering the flowers, and so on. How about entertainment? I think we will have a home theater so that we can (57) , or even play sports with your virtual friends. Will your father have to go to work? I don't think so. People can have offices at home so that they (58) from home. They can use (59) to contact their manager. And do you think we will live (60) planets in the future? Everything can happen, but maybe it will be very different.

VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text.

When life changes so fast, the family life will change, too. So what will a family be (61) after a hundred years? We can't have the correct answers. Parents will have (62) babies. They can even choose their child's hair or eye colour. The mother will be busy but she will get help (63) some friendly house robots. When the family go out together, they will travel on flying cars. These cars will be much faster and there will be no traffic jams (64) each flying car can have its own way. There will be love and (65) between the family members. 61. A. enjoy B. like C. as D. so 62. A. healthier B. healthiest C. health D. healthful  A. 63. 64. A. with  so 65. A. care

B. of B. because B. careful

C. at C. although C. careless

D. from D. but D. carefully

VIII. Read the passage carefully, and then choose the correct answers.

In the future, people will build houses on the moon. The best place for houses in a moon town will be underground. Underground houses will be safe, and the temperatures will not be very high during daytime and not very low at night. Moon homes may be balloons with oxygen, and people will wear oxygen masks when they are away from home because the moon has no air around it. The house might have beds, tables, and chairs, so people will sleep, eat, and work in their home. Moon-house building will be easy. 66. In a moon town, what is the best place for house? A. a balloon C. underground D. in the air the ground 67. Which of the followingB.is on true? A. The people on the moon will not leave their homes. B. The people on the moon will wear oxygen masks when they leave their homes. C. The moon homes are very hot during daytime. D. The temperatures will be very high during daytime and very low at night. 68. Why do people need oxygen when they stay on the moon? A. Because the moon is too large. B. Because the moon houses are full of air. C. Because people sleep, eat, and work outside their houses. D. Because the moon has no air. 69. How comfortable are the houses on the moon? A. They have furniture for people to sleep, eat, or work.

B. They have many balloons. C. They don't have any furniture. k inds of furniture. D. They have all kinds

70. In the writer's opinion, will people build houses on the moon?  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 126

 

 

A. No, they can't. B. They might not do it. C. Of course, they will. D. People only think so. IX. Write the sentences with " will", using the words/ phrases given.

71. My mother/ make/ a big meal/ tonight.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 72. I/ finish/ work/ 6 p.m.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 73. I/ not have/ a birthday birthda y party/ this year.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 74. You/ meet/ Lan/ tonight?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. We/ take/ our cousins/ holiday/ us.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 76. My friends/ not come/ tonight.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. He/ catch/ the train/ London/ 9 o'clock.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. I/ not come/ class/ tomorrow.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. My grandmother/ visit/ us/ Saturday.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. You/ stay/ home/ this weekend?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 127

 

 

Unit 11: OUR GREENER WORLD A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part.

car

hand

fat

calm

 start

castle

aren’t  

park

map

rapid

natural

man

/a:/

/æ/

……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….  

………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………  

II. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. stand B. hand C. father  

apple  D. apple 

2.   3. 4.  5. 

D. a utomatic    calm  calm   D.  automatic D. fact fact   action  D. action 

A. yard  yard    bad A.   bad  A. cameras  cameras  A. dark  

B. activity activity  cat     B.  cat B. fantastic fantastic   travel   B. travel

C. had had    bag C.   bag  C.  part  part  cancel  C. cancel 

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Put the words from the box into the correct column. One word can belong to more than one group.  group. 

waste

plastic bags

paper waste

old newspapers

bottles

empty cans

rubbish

plastic

rubber

metal

cotton

glass

batteries

old clothes

dirty water

engine oil

ink

kitchen waste

aluminum

iron

Reduce

Reuse

Recycle

……………………………………   ……………………………………   …………………………………… ……………………………………   ……………………………………  

……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………  

……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………   ……………………………………  

II. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb.  verb. 

1. If we win the money, we (buy) 2. We (go) 3. If we (need)

a new house. on holiday if there is time . some help, we'll ask.

4. She (not write) to you if she leaves. 5. If Harry stays with his grandparents, Sally (not be) 6. We (do) this for you if you want.

happy.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 128

 

 

III. Choose the correct word. 1. If we miss/ will miss the bus, we take/ will take the taxi. 2. If you don't eat/ won't eat  fruit,  fruit, you get/ will get  a  a cold. 3. If you help/ will help me, I lend/ will lend  you  you that Beyoncé CD. 4. If he doesn't stop/ won't stop smoking, he has/ will have problems later. 5. You are/ will be on time if you run/ will run. 6. She goes/ will go to the party if you invite/ will invite her. 7. They see/ will see the new Lara Croft film if they  go/ will go to the cinema. 8. I come/ will come over to your house if you rent/ will rent  a  a DVD. IV. Match the phrases to form a sentence in the first conditional, and write the answer in each blank.

 ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______  ______

1. If you wear that shirt 2. If you invite her to the cinema 3. If you touch that dog 4. If it's hot tomorrow 5. If I phone you at nine 6. If he drives that car fast 7. If we leave now 8. If I give you some money

a. it'll bite you b. will you be at home? c. he'll have an accident. d. we'll be home by ten. e. you'll look really good. f. will you buy some chocolate for me? g. we'll go to the beach. h. I'm sure she'll say yes

C. SPEAKING I. Complete the dialogue with the expressions in the box.

 you save fifteen to twenty percent of the water  you put the bottle in the bathroom  fill it with water

it saves water What for? you can reuse it

 Miss Hanh: 

Oh, don't throw away that plastic bottle. (1) .  Lan: An old plastic bottle? (2) .  Miss Hanh:  To save water, you put some small stones in the bottle and (3) . stones and water make the bottle heavy (4) , oh in the toilet tank.  Lan:  You put it in the toilet tank?  Miss Hanh:  Yeah, (5) every time you empty the tank. (6) .  Lan:  It saves that much water? Wow! II. Ask and answer the questions. Use the phrases given or your own answers.

1. What do you recycle? - I recycle ____________________________ ____________________________________. ________. (plastic bottles/ metal cans/ glass jars/ newspapers/ juice cartons) 2. What do you think about the recycled recycled items? –  I   I think they are __________________. (cool/ fashionable/ colourful/ fun) 3. Have you you ever made anything from your your old things? - _________________________ _________________________.. have./ I haven't.) 4. (Yes, What Idid you No, make? - I made a ________________________ ___________________________________________. ___________________.

The

(bag/ pencil case/ greeting card/ gift box box// picture) 5. What did you you use? - I used some some old _________________________ _______________________________________. ______________. (clothes/ cardboard/ paper/ ribbon/ plastic/ magazines)  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 129

 

 

D. READING I. Complete the passage with the words given in the box.

waste

surprised

resources

recycling

ton

labor

thrown

discussion

requires

preserved 

 

Ba's class has a (1) on waste paper. His friends are so (2) to learn that every day throughout the world, millions of newspapers and paper bags are (3) away. People are collecting waste paper and (4) it. Making paper (5) a lot of trees and labor. Now if people don't (6) paper, they can save (7) and money. Especially,  people can save the natural (8) . For every (9) of recycled newsprint, ten trees can be saved. The more paper people save, the more natural resources are (10) . II. Read the text. Each of the sentences has one mistake, and try to correct the mistakes.

 An Ec E co H ome  John Kangister and his wife, wife, Kathy live in an interesting interesting house. It's an eco eco home. Eco homes don't harm the environment. They don't use coal or oil, so they don't produce dangerous gases. John and Kathy's eco home is in California, USA. It looks like a house from one of The Lord of the Rings   films. Most of the house is underground. The house was very cheap to build. It has wooden walls, and floors. The windows are recycled glass. There are solar panels to make electricity for the lights, DVD players, and computers. John and Kathy get water from a well and they grow vegetables in the mud on top of the house.

 Now John and Kathy don't want to live anywhere else. They love their home because it helps the planet greener and it looks fantastic. They think that eco homes are a great idea for everyone. 1. Eco homes don't produce dangerous chemicals.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Eco homes don't use electricity.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. The house was expensive to build.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. The eco home has stone floors.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. John and Kathy grow grow flowers on top of the house.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ III. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions.

G ett ttii ng bac ackk to nat natur ure e The Little Morocco is a beautiful building. We used stone and mud to build the hotel. There are skylights windows in roof to let light in - so we save electricity. The skylights give us light in the day, we don't use electric lights. We don't use chemicals to clean the rooms because we don't want to damage the environment. You can walk in the mountains near the hotel and see lots of local wildlife. Enjoy a boat trip on the lake and see the amazing waterfalls. or visit the beautiful caves. 1. What did they use to to build the house?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. How can the skylights help us to save electricity?

 __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Why don't they use chemicals to clean the rooms?

 ________________________ _____________________________________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. What can you you see in the mountains? mountains?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 130

 

 

5. What are are the activities for a boat trip?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ E. WRITING I. Match each part in A with the corresponding in B, writing the answer in each blank. Answer

 ______ 1. If we plant more trees trees  

A

B

A. we will save a lot of water. water.  

 ______ 2. If we borrow books from the library instead of B. they will make the air more polluted.  polluted.   buying    buying C. we will have more oxygen to breathe.  breathe.   ______ 3. If we have a shower instead of a bath bath   D. the plants will die.  ______ 4. If people use more cars cars   die.    ______ 5. If the soil is polluted polluted   money.   E. we save our money. II. Make the first conditional sentences, using the words and phrases given.

1. If/ we/ plant/ more trees/ neighbourhood/ greener.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. If/ we/ cycle/ school/ every day/ we/ keep/ air/ clean and fresh. fresh.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3.  ________________________ If/ we/ keep/ hunt/ animals/ they/ disappear/ soon.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. If/ we/ cut down/ all/ trees/ there/ there/ floods. floods.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. If/ we/ use/ buses /we/ reduce/ pollution. pollution.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 131

 

 

TEST (UNIT 11) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. can B. star C. bag 2.  A. far B. plant C. plan 3.  A. plastic B. start C. stand 4.  A. smart B. channel C. cancer B. heart C. card 5.  A. cart

D. that D. hat D. land D. thanks D. animal

II. 6.  7.  8.  9. 

Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. A. plastic B. glass C. metal A. reduce B. repeat C. reuse A. bottle B. bag C. bin A. refillable B. reusable C. recycled 10. A. floods B. rubbish C. litter

D. bag D. recycle D. paper D. repair D. garbage

III. Choose the correct answers. of trees. III.

11. If we  we  repeat  A. repeat 

waste paper, we will save a lot of trees. trees. recycle   rewrite   B. recycle C. rewrite

remake  D. remake 

12. If we plant more trees in  in the schoolyard, the school will become a place.. place A. greener   B. darker C. dirtier D. more polluted  polluted  the lights when you go out of the classroom?"  classroom?"  13. "Why do you often forget to  to  on  close  down  A. turn on  B. turn off   C. close  D. shut down  do   air pollution?"  pollution?"  14. "What can we do reduce   reduce   reducing   reducing  A. reduce B. to reduce C. reducing D. to reducing  15. You can save money while shopping by only buying  buying   you need need..  A. what B. it C. this D. that less, by using less and using things again, in 16. "Reduce, reuse, recycle" is said to encourage people to waste less, order to the environment environment . . A. harm B. damage damage   C.  pollute  pollute  D. protect   protect  collect materials, and take  r  them to the  the   17. Please   all the recyclable  recycled recycled    ecyclable  ecyclable  recycle  recycle A.

B.

C.

18. This newspaper is made of    paper . A. recycle  recycle  B. recycled recycled   C. old old    If we all use   bags, we'll help the environment environment.. 19. If 19. use  A. new  new  B. cheap cheap   C. reusable  reusable  20. These three Rs  Rs  . reduce, reuse, and recycle recycle   up  A. stand up  B. stand for   C. ask for   21. If there is a rubbish bin in every ever y class, the classroom will become  become  A. harmful B. lighter C. dirtier 22. "Don't throw rubbish into the river because you will make it  it   A. greener use  23. If we use 

B. C.  paper, dirty we will save a lot of trees. trees cleaner .

factory factory. . recycling   D. recycling  D. waste  waste  D. reduced  reduced 

means  D. means  . D. cleaner ."  D. fresher

A. fewer  

B. less less  

C. more  more 

D. much  much 

24. You should put the food in a reusable box  box   plastic bag bag.. because of   without  C.  because D. without  A. by B. instead of   25. If people turn off all electric appliances in one o ne hour all over the world, they can save lots of    Lưu Hoằng Trí  

.

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 132

 

 

electric   A. electric

electrical   B. electrical

electrician  C. electrician 

electricity  D. electricity 

our clothes with our friends or cousins cousins.. 26. It is a good idea to  to   A. change  change  B. swap swap   C. turn turn   D. send  send   Next week our class is having a discussion about finding  ways to reuse old items before 27. Next 27. finding  throwing them away. away. surprising   useless  creative  interested  B. surprising C. useless  D. creative  A. interested  28. If you have old clothes, will you give them to those  those   ? B. to need need   C. for needing needing   D. in need  need  A. needs  needs  29. My brother and I will give last year's clothes to  to  instead of throwing them away. away. shop   people  charity   B.  people  C. charity D survey.  A. shop  bin in every classroom in order to keep it clean?" clean?"   30. "Do you think we should put aa   A. reusable reusable   B. recycled recycled   C. recycling recycling   D. recyclable  recyclable  IV. Fill in each blank with ONE correct word.

31. is the act of cutting down or burning the trees in an area. 32. is the act of using rubbish to remake new things that can be sold again. 33. We should turn off all the lights and fans before we the classroom. 34. If we breathe air, we will have breathing problems. 35. You can take these bottles to the factory to them. 36. off old the newspapers, lights when we a lot of . 37. If If we we turn recycle we are willnot using them, we will a lotsave of trees. 38. If we walk or cycle to school, we will improve our health and air pollution. 39. Recycling starts when we put rubbish such as empty bottles and cans in the recycling . 40. When you go to the supermarket, you should before you buy in order not to buy things you don't need later. V. Write conditional sentences from these statements.

41. We will plant more trees. The air will be fresher. If _____________________________________________________________________________________ 42. We will use fewer cars. We will reduce pollution. If _____________________________________________________________________________________. 43. We will cycle to school every day. We will keep fitter. If _____________________________________________________________________________________. 44. We will use recycled products. We will save money. If _____________________________________________________________________________________. 45. People will throw rubbish into the right bin. They will keep the environment clean. If _____________________________________________________________________________________. 46. We will turn off the tap when brushing the teeth. We will save a lot of water. If _____________________________________________________________________________________. 47. People will travel more by public transport. The harmful gases in big cities will be reduced. If _____________________________________________________________________________________. 48. We will start at 6.00. We will arrive there before noon. If _____________________________________________________________________________________. 49. The boy eats so may ma y green apples. He will be ill.

If _____________________________________________________________________________________. 50. We will use reusable bags for shopping. We will reduce waste. If _____________________________________________________________________________________.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 133

 

 

VI. Rearrange the sentences to make a meaningful conversation. Jack Can my sister and I come with you? We have lots of garbage, too. Ann: Sure. We're leaving at two o'clock. Let's meet outside your house. Jack:  What are you you doing this afternoon? Jack: It's OK. See you then. Ann:  Dad and I are taking all our garbage to the recycling center.

51. 52. 53. 54. 55.

_______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________

VII. Fill in each blank of the conversation with ONE word. Jack Don't worry. We can help you clean up. Linda We'll need (56) people. I'm (57)

our friends and families.

Soon... Linda  Thanks for (58) , everyone. We pick up all the litter and (59) it. There are bags here (60) plastic, metal, paper, and glass. inside them. They can kill birds and fish. Daisy  Batteries are dangerous. They have (61) That's really sad.The river is black and dirty, but it will be clean soon. That's the (62) Look, everyone. thing. Linda Yes, you're right. Daisy  Look. This bird is trapped. It can't (63) . Jack   Poor thing. Can I help? Daisy  Yes, you hold him still and I'll (64) the plastic bag. Linda  Oh, the TV reporters are coming. Jack   We (65) help them to make the documentary. Linda Jack  

VIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following follow ing passage.

Last month Lan's father (66) her to a glass factory. They visited the recycling workshop where the broken glass was smashed (67) small pieces, and the glass was washed with a particular detergent liquid. After that, it was dried up and mixed (68) some chemicals. The mixture was put into a very (69) temperature furnace to melt into liquid. The workers in the factory used long pipes (70 ) the liquid into a variety of shapes. All the glassware looks nice. Lan was very impressed by b y the journey. 66. A. asked B. took C. told D. gave 67. A. under B. into C. in D. on 68. A. in B. of C. up D. with 69. A. high B. strong C. low D. weak 70. A. change B. to make C. to blow D. to have IX. Read the following passage, and then answer the questions below.

Everyand daythrown of theaway. year throughout the requires world, about twenty paper the newspapers are screwed Making paper a lot of woodmillion pulp and the bags work and of millions of workers.

Many countries have had plans to recycle waste paper to save money and labor. In countries where there is the cooperation of the public, paper mills recycle as much as sixty percent of waste paper. Their simple work is to take away the ink, crush it up and make it into pulp again. For every ton of recycled newsprint, twelve trees can  be saved. We can insist that the more paper people save, the more trees are preserved.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 134

 

 

71. How many paper bags and newspapers are screwed and thrown away every day?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 72. What have many countries done to save money and labor in making paper?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 73. What percentage of waste paper is recycled with the help of the public?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 74 What do the paper mills do to to reuse waste waste paper?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. How many trees can be saved for every ton of recycled newsprint?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ X. Make sentences using the words and phrases given.

76. We/ try/ recycled/ rubbish.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. Don't/ throw/ plastic bags/ because/ you/ reuse.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. You/ use/ reusable bags/ when/ you/ shopping.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. If/ river/ polluted/ fish/ die.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. If/ people/ cycle/ more/ there/ less/ pollution.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 135

 

 

Unit 12:

ROBOTS

A. PHONETICS Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part.

toy  south

cow boy

flower pound

noise how

our town

 soil out

shout boil

now coin

voice round

house town

/ɔi/

/aʊ/

……………………………………………….   ……………………………………………….   ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….  

………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………   ………………………………………………  

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR. I. Put the words or phrases given in the box in the correct line with the appropriate verbs. There are some that can be put more than one line.

bed laundry hair cakes research  something

homework the factory coffee Cartons mistakes a desk

faces heavy boxes own clothes the place our house the lecture

voices furniture the idea Suitcases a phone call this

breakfast the baby housework the palace suggestions this song

l. recognize:    __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2.  __________________________________________________ do:  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3.  make:   __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. understand:  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. lift:   __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

6. guard:  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 136

 

 

II. Fill the table below with the correct phrases from the box. Write sentences using "will be able to".

cook our meals 

 give lessons

make cars 

correct homework

look after the patients

take care of the garden

 find new materials

give us medicines when

help students with their homework

we are sick build new space stations

feed babies

make new medicines

take our temperatures

write poems

guard our house all day

design new machines

work in the mines

build houses on the moon

explain the lessons again 

control home appliances build cities on Mars Types of robots

What they can do

Home robots

Teaching robots

Worker robots

Doctor robots

Space robots

 Example: Home robots will be able to cook our meals.

 ________________________ _____________________________________________________  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ III. Write questions using "could" and use them to ask your partners.

 Example: ready four  "Could

you read when you were four?" - "Yes, I could./ No, I couldn't."

1. write your name/ two?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. walk/ one?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 137

 

 

3. count to ten/ three?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. speak English/ twelve?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. ride a bike/ ten?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ IV. Complete the sentences, using "couldn't" and the verbs in the box.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

 find

finish

go

hear

listen

play

sleep

understand

My dad John Mary wasn't hungry - she I We Tom I was very tired but I We

to work because he was ill. his pen. It wasn't in his school bag. her lunch. Jane because I don't speak German. the teacher because the students were very noisy. to music because his CD player was broken. . tennis because the weather was bad.

C. SPEAKING What could/ can/ will a robot do? Make conversations between student A and student B talking about their robots, using "could/ can/ will be able to". Robots Past Now Future clean the floors  recognize the voice  understand people  Robot 1 (Student A) guard the house  greet people in Vietnamese and  play football  English 

lift heavy boxes  Robot 2 (Student B)

take care of the garden 

control the temperatures of the  play the piano  house  wash vegetables  cook meals 

 Example: 

A: My robot could clean the floors ….. and when I bought it. Now …..   B: Great! My robot could …..   _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  _____________________________________________________  ___________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ D. READING I. Read the text, and decide whether the statements are True or F alse. 

Worker robots are becoming more popular in industries. Nowadays they can do more difficult jobs in many

factories. The use of robots helps factories increase the quality of their products because robots can do the job well for many hours while humans can get tired and bored. Engineers can make robots more effective and useful at home, at school, and at work.

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 138

 

 

However, a robot uses on average about 100 more times energy than a human to do the same job. The latest 20 kg robot can lift 2 kg, but a 5 kg human arm can lift 50 kg. True False

1. Factories are using more robots. 2. The use of robots helps make the quality of the products better.

 

 

 

 

3. Robots play an important role at homes, at schools, and in offices.

 

 

4. For the same job, a robot uses the same amount of energy as a worker does. 5. With the same same weight, a robot lift lift things heavier than a man can do.

 

 

 

 

II. Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

People are very interested in robots. Some of them look like mechanical dolls to play with. Most of them look like other machines of today's high technology. Serious research on intelligent robots began in the 1960s in several countries. Now we are on the fifth generation of robots. The first robots were very expensive. They cost $500,000 when a worker could do the same work for $15 an hour. By the early 1970s, a robot brain, a computer, cost $300,000. Today's robots cost from $15,000 to $150,000. One of the advantages of robots is that they can work in situations that are dangerous or harmful for human workers. Today there are millions of people who work at machines in the world. Robots will replace them. Part of the  problem will be solved because of the decrease in the number of births. There will be fewer people looking for  jobs. Many people will find changes in their jobs, and they will not like some of them. The students of today must be sure that these changes are good. Robots must improve, not harm, the quality of human life. 1. What generation generation of robots are are we on now?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. What is one of the advantages advantages of robots?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. What makes a robot brain?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. Why aren't people no longer worried that robots will replace them?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. What is the thing that students of today are sure? sure?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ III. Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

Most robots today are industrial robots. Humans use them to make work easier and quicker. You often see them in car factories where they put the  parts of the cars together. They are useful for this kind of work as it is 'dull, dirty and dangerous'  –  DVD.   DVD. Robots are often used for DDD jobs and where a specific action needs to be repeated. It is very difficult for humans to do this. There are many different types of robots. Some robots travel through space, work on the bottom of the ocean, or go inside volcanoes. They do the work of people, but for a different reason this time: there are places that are very dangerous for people, or impossible for people to go to.

Robots are everywhere. Most people don't know that robots help us everyday and in many different ways. In most houses, there are robots. For example, in some houses today there is a washing machine in the kitchen. Washing machines are robots. People can programme them and then they wash clothes automatically. Some scientists make robots for fun. For example, the dogs are made as toys to ys for small children.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 139

 

 

Japan produces the most robots. Every year in the capital, Tokyo, there is a robot exhibition called Robodex. It is the largest robot exhibition in the world. 1. What can robots do in car factories?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 2. Why are robots useful useful or this kind of work? work?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 3. Why do people often often use robots to work on the the bottom of the ocean or inside volcanoes?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 4. How can people make washing machines useful?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 5. Can robots bring us fun? fun? Give an example.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ E. WRITING Write sentences about what robots will be able to do or will not be able to do in the year 2050, using "will be able to" or "won't be able to" and the clues given.

  do all the housework   have conversations with us   guard all our houses, offices, and factories

   

examine our health give us medicines for our illnesses take care of sick people look after small children and old people give lessons in classrooms help students do their homework design other robots make planes, ships, spaceships  ____________________________________________________  __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ____________________________________________________  __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ____________________________________________________  __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ____________________________________________________  __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ____________________________________________________  __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ____________________________________________________  __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ____________________________________________________  __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  ____________________________________________________  __________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________                

      

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 140

 

 

TEST (UNIT 12) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. house B. mouse C. shout 2.  A. noise B. soil C. doing 3.  A. could B. our C. should 4.  A. so B. told C. now B. house C. sound 5.  A. lesson

D. ought D. boil D. would D. go D. noisy

II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6.  A. could B. will C. can 7.  A. love B. like C. enjoy 8.  A. wasteful B. useful C. helpful 9.  A. expensive B. useful C. costly 10. A. feeling B. emotion C. thinking

D. run D. hate D. careful D. noisy D. activity

III. Choose the correct answers.

11. Robots can  can  see  A. see 

our houses when we are away away.. guard   at  B. guard C. look at 

D. look  

more  things for us. us. 12. In the future, robots will be able to do more  A. easy  easy  B. harder   C. complicated complicated   D. much difficul  difficul  you that robots will be able to write a letter to an English friend. friend. 13. I don't agree  agree  about   A. of B. about C. to D. with everything for us us.. 14. They will be very useful because they will be able to do  do  most  almost   A. most  B. most of   C. almost D. almost of   15. "Do you think robots can work longer than people people   getting tired?"  tired?"  with   C. without without   D. of   A. but B. with coffee at home instead of going to the coffee shop. shop. 16. My father always  always  does   A. do B. does C. make D. makes 17. Robots will be able to  to  the personal computer in the future future.. A. do  do 

B. replace replace  

C. make make  

D. recognise recognise  

18. Nowadays robots can't talk to people or play sport, 18. Nowadays sport,  but  but in the future I think they . A. can B. could C. will D. do our voices?" voices?"   19. "Will robots be able  able  A. to recognise  recognise  B. recognising recognising   C. to recognising recognising   D. for recognising  recognising  but  scientists are working the solution solution.. 20. Robots can't talk to people or recognise our voices, but A. at B. on C. in D. with 21. Many people think spending money on robots is a complete  complete  of time and money money.. waste  amount   A. cut B. number   C. waste  D. amount 22. "  you walk when you were two?"  two?"  A. Can B. Could C. Will D. Do 23. These robots can do  do many things for the

such as cleaning streets or watering plants plants..

common   A. common

best  B.  best 

human   C. human

public  D.  public 

24. Home robots can do things things   repairing things around the house or looking after the garden. garden . A. such B. like C. with D. of do you think about the new kinds of robots?" robots?"   25. "   Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 141

 

 

A. How

What   B. What

Why   C. Why

When  D. When 

us   the gardening. 26. Our future robot will be able to help us A. do do   B. make make   C. try D. plant   plant  27. "Robots are helping us  us a lot in industry, education, and in our house" - ""   A. I agree with you you   B. I hope not  not  you?   that?   D. What about you? C. Do you agree with that?  28. "We waste a lot of money and time researching and making robots" "  "  ". A. I think not.  B. I don't think so. not.    I agree with. with.   29. We peopso.  must be careful because some people le  may use  useC. robots . things  B. to do good things things   things  A. do good things  C. do bad things  energy.. energy 30. Robots will be very useful for our  lives but they use A. some  some  B. a little little   C. 



D. I don't hope so. so.  

things   D. to do bad things D. too much  much 

IV. Write sentences with "can/ could/ will be able to", using the information about robots in the table.

31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40.

Past

Now

- (31) lift heavy things - (32) make and serve coffee - (33) answer the door

- (34) guard the house - (35) understand what we say - (36) do the gardening - (37) greet people in English

Future

- (38) take care of the house hou se - (39) play football - (40) design other robots

_______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________

V. Complete the conversations with the phrases in the box, expressing your opinion.  

 I'm sorry, I don't agree.

I agree with you.

I don't think so. 

41. A: Robots make our lives easier and more comfortable. B:_____________________________________________________________________________________ 42. A: Robots can work everywhere in the world, including on the seabed or in a volcano. B:_____________________________________________________________________________________ 43. A: Teaching robots can explain the lessons again or help students with their homework. B:_____________________________________________________________________________________ 44. A: Worker robots will be able to play p lay sports. B:_____________________________________________________________________________________ 45. A: Home robots will be able to have conversations with us. B:_____________________________________________________________________________________

VI. Fill in each blank with ONE suitable word.

46. I think robots are very useful they won't be able to do all of our work. 47. the bed when you get out of your bedroom. 48. Space robots can build space on the Moon, and on many other planets.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 142

 

 

49. Home robots can cook, make tea, or the laundry. 50. robots will be able to do most of our work and we will live more comfortably. 51. Our class are talking about the of robots in the future. 52. Robots will be able to our voices. 53. We think home robots will be able to do all of our work at home, and there will be to do. 54. They will be able to do many things humans. 55. Now robots can the house and catch any robber trying to enter it.

for us

VII. Fill in each blank with the phrases in the box to complete the conversation.

John: Peter: Mary: John: John: Mai:

 I don't think so

That's right, Tom

What Wh at abou aboutt

Is tha thatt ri ht  

I certainly agree with you

Today we will have a discussion about robots. Do we need robots? What is John your opinion, Peter? Well, I think robots are now very useful because they can help us do many things, especially simple and repeated jobs. But they will never be able to do all of our work. (56) , Mary? (57) . Robots are only machines, so they can't do creative and difficult  jobs. (58) you, Tom? (59) . In the past, robots could only do simple things, but in the future they will  be more "intelligent" and will be able to understand what we say, talk to us, and do most of our work. (60) . And our life will be more comfortable and interesting.

VIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits fi ts the blank space in the following passage.

Rescue robots (61) hi-tech toys, but we are now using more robotic planes, helicopters. We can use them after storms, earthquakes, or fires to provide us with important (62) . They have cameras and microphones that help rescue workers understand how much damage (63) and (64) where the victims are. These planes work (65) between 30 and 120 metres in the air and they can rescue people in somewhere very dangerous. B. look like C. looks like D. look at 61. A. look 62. A. information B. newspapers C. ideas D. thing 63. A. there B. it was C. there has D. there is 64. A. find B. find out C. finds D. finds out 65. A. much B. more C. the best D. best IX. Read the passage, and then decide whether the statements are True or F alse.

In South Korea, the robot Olympics takes place every year. It brings together groups from around the world who are interested in robots. At the event, people of all ages can take part in the competition. Children as young as six years old build and make programmes for robots that can do all kinds of things such as running or kicking a ball - that's very useful in sports. a bar Robot Wars is another form of entertainment for robot lovers. It is a TV show and remote-controlled robot

toy cars take part in games. The most popular game is when teams of people make the toy cars fight each other until there is the only one that can run - the winner. The first Robot Wars competition was held in San Francisco in August, 1994. People from over 45 countries, including Britain, Sweden, Italy and China now can watch that TV show.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 143

 

 

Questions: 

True/ False 

66. The robot Olympics takes place every four years. 67. Only the teams from South Korea take part in the robot Olympics. 68. Robot lovers are people who are interested in designing, making, using and watching robots. 69. Old and young children can build robots at the event. 70. Robots at the robot Olympics can be useful in sports.

_________ _________ _________

71. cars take part inwas theheld Robot competitions. 72. Remote-controlled The first Robot Wars competition in Wars the USA. 73. People in Asia do not watch the Robot Wars competitions. 74. People from many countries in the world can watch the Robot Rob ot Wars competitions on TV. 75. Robots can be used for fun.

_________ _________ _________

_________ _________

_________ _________

X. Make sentences using the words and phrases given.

76. Robots/ not only/ talk/ people/ but/ understand/ what/ they/ think.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. Robots/ recognize/ our voices/ faces/ they/ not/ think/ like/ humans.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. You/ think/ robots/ build houses/ sea/ us?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. I/ agree/ you/ that/ life/ more comfortable/ future.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. More people/ lose/ jobs/ robots/ do/ many man y kinds/ jobs.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 144

 

 

TE ST YOURS YOURSE E LF 4 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1.  A. card B. hand C. band 2.  A. thank B. think C. through 3.  A. town B. own C. cow 4.  A. loud B. should C. sound 5.  A. yard B. bad C. cat

D. stand D. then D. town D. mountain D. hat

II. Choose the correct answers.

6. If people can  can  wastes, they will save a lot of money mone y. reduce   rebuild   use  reuse  B. reduce C. rebuild D. use  A. reuse  7. new technology, we now have super smart TVs, smart phones phones..  A. Because Because   B. Because of   C. Thanks Thanks   D. Thanks to  to  we will have more time for our family. family .  8. Robots will do most of the housework,  housework,   but  although  A. so B.  but  C. although  D. if 9. We should have recycling bins in each e ach classroom for   things. reuse   C. reused  reused  D. reusable  reusable  A. use B. reuse 10. If the soil plant more the      trees,B. A.we  neighbour 

will beC. greener   air .

D. neighbourhood  neighbourhood 

11. All of the machines will have a special card  11. All card  . start   starting  starting  start  B. to start C. starting  D. to starting  A. start  12. If we we   all the trees, there will be no more ox oxygen ygen for us to breathe. breathe. A. cuts  cuts  B. cut off   C. cutting cutting   D. cut down  down  use air-conditioners. air-conditioners. 13. We should open all the windows, so we don't  don't  have  to   needn't   need  A. have  B. have to C. needn't D. need  14. Plant Plant  more trees in the schoolyard because the theyy will provide shade and the atmosphere fresher . A. do B. make C. have D. use the   clean and green. green. 15. Our dream house will use only solar energy energ y so that we can make the C. kitchen D. home A. nature     environment environment  kitchen    bills. nature 16. Many products are nowB.helping you  you    your energy bills.  A. reduce B. reuse reuse   C. recycle  recycle  D. cut down  down  17. It takes a lot of energy to keep food cool, so don't  don't  the fridge door open or putting hot things inside.. inside A. make B. have C. leave D. stop 18. Future houses will have hi-tech  hi-tech   rooms for all of the family members. members. A. read B. to read C. reading D. to reading 19. Our houses will use the sun or the wind  wind   electricity electricity.. A. to have B. to do C. to make D. to give 20. In the future, cars might use energy from from   . A. gas B. water C. oil D. power   power   21. Our dream house will be located located   the sea. sea.

A. on

B. at

22. Don't  Don't  A. throw 23.

C. in

 between  D. between 

old things because perhaps you will need them later . B. throw away C. throwing causes many breathing problems. problems.

D. throwing away  away 

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 145

 

 

A. Fresh air

B. Fresher air

C. Polluting air

D. Polluted air  

that   24. We won't use CD players because we will have smart watches that  A. play B. plays C. hear 25. If 25. eat   If you eat  fast food, you will be fatter easily. easily. A. very B. very much C. too much

music music.. D. listen to D. most

III. Complete the first conditional sentences. III.

26. If we stay at home, we (miss)

the show.

27. We (ask) about it, if you want. 28. If he (want) it, we'll buy it. 29. If it (not/ work) , we'll take it back. 30. They (not/ go) on holiday this year, if their friends come to see them. 31. You will be tired tomorrow if you (not/ go) to bed early. 32. (the boys/ wear) their new T-shirts tomorrow if it is sunny? 33. The cake (burn) if he doesn't turn off the oven. 34. We won't go to the beach tomorrow if it (rain) . 35. Will you walk to school if the bus (not/ come) soon? IV. Fill in each blank with ONE suitable word.

36. Soil pollution can make die. 37. What do these three Rs for? 38. If we all use this kind of bag, we'll help to protect the . 39. We should find ways to reuse our old items before throwing them away. 40. If the river is not , there will be more fish. won't  t  or V. Complete the conversation with wi ll, won'  or might . A  Do you think it (41) rain tomorrow? I don't think so. I think it (42) be sunny. It (43) B A  B  A  B

it certainly (44) be rainy. I think I (45) go to the beach. I (46) come with you or I (47) stay at home. I (48) help my sister make a poster. She (49) need a new one. (50) you go to the library with me now? OK!

VI. Complete the conversation. Use the first conditional. A (51) B  A  B  A B 

be cloudy but

(you come to the concert/ I buy the tickets) Yes, I (52) . I (53. ask) Jack if he (54. want) If Jack (55. come) , I (56) OK. If I (57. see) her, I (58. ask) If she (59. not want) to come, I (60. ask) else.

?

to come too. certainly go! her. her out somewhere



That s fine.

VII. Read the passage, and then fill in each blank with ONE appropriate word.  produce

I would like to live in one of the (61) modern houses in the world. It will produce all the energy it needs from the (62) energy, the wind energy, but not from gas, or oil. There will be modern electronic (63) in the kitchen such as a smart refrigerator, a dishwasher, a microwave oven, and so on.  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 146

 

 

The house will also have a hi-tech TV that helps us to watch TV programmes from space. A home robot will be able to do all of (64) , so our life will become more comfortable than ever (65) . 61. A. much B. more C. most D. almost 62. A. sun B. solar C. sunny D. cloudy 63. A. appliances B. tools C. machines D. equip 64. A. housework B. the housework C. homework D. the homework 65. A. until B. after C. before D. then VIII. Read the text, and then decide whether the sentences are True or F alse.

 As go goo od as ne new w Do you think that people can make a fun bag with old juice cartons? The colourful T-shirt was once plastic  bottles. It takes five large plastic bottles to make one large T-shirt. Scientists can make baseball caps from  plastic bottles, too. They can also make sports shoes from car tyres. tyres. People use old newspapers, comics, and bus tickets to make beautiful bracelets.  Next time you are out shopping, see how many recycled items you can find. Or why not try making something new from your old garbage? You can make greeting cards from old paper and magazines. You can make book covers from old plastic bags, posters, maps or even clothes. You save wrapping paper, gift boxes, and ribbons and use them again. 66. The shoes might be car tyres. ____________ 67. It is possible for scientists to recycle car tyres. ____________ 68. It takes one large bottle to make five large T-shirts. ____________ 69. You can make book covers from clothes. ____________ 70. You can reuse wrapping paper, gift boxes, and ribbons. ____________ IX. Read the text, and then answer the questions.

G i ve yo your ur g ar arba bagg e a new new hom home Recycling is a great idea, but before you throw your garbage into a recycling bin, stop and think. There are lots of other things you can do with your garbage.   How about giving your old books, toys, or clothes to a charity? The charity will sell your old things to make money.   Why not take old boxes, wrapping paper, greeting cards, and ribbons to a local school? Teachers will use them for art classes.   What about taking old boxes and newspapers to pet shops? They will use them to make beds for the animals.   Why not take old magazines to a local doctors offices? They will put them in the waiting room for  patients to read.   Some supermarkets recycle plastic bags, so you can c an return your bags to them. Your garbage is useful to other people. Find a new home for your old things and help your town. 71. Where can you take your old toys?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 72. Where can you take your old boxes, wrapping paper, and greeting cards?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 73. Where can you take your old newspapers? 









 __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

74. Where can you take your old magazines?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 75. Where can you take your plastic bags?  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________  Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 147

 

 

X. Make sentences using the words and phrases given.

76. When/ Nam/ ten/ he/ speak/ English/ phone.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 77. My sister/ write/ poems/ she/ eight.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 78. They/ worried/ that/ some people/ use/ robots/ bad things.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 79. ________________________ If/ people/ plant/more trees/ area/ there/ be/ no floods.  __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________ 80. If/ we/ recycle/ old newspapers/ we/ save/ lot/ labour/ trees.  __________________________________________________  ________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________ __________

 Lưu Hoằng Trí  

 Bài tập Tiếng Anh lớp 6 | 148

 

 

MỤC LỤC   

Unit 1:

MY NEW SCHOOL  ..............................................................................................................

Unit 2: Unit 3:

MY HOME  ............................................................................................................................ 13 MY FRIENDS  ....................................................................................................................... 26

Test yourself 1  ...........................................................................................................................................

1

38

Unit 4:

NEIGHBOURHOOD  ........................................................................................................... 44

Unit 5:

NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD  .................................................................... 55

Unit 6:

OUR TET HOLIDAY  .......................................................................................................... 67

Test yourself 2  ...........................................................................................................................................

77

Unit 7:

TELEVISION........................................................................................................................

80

Unit 8:

SPORTS AND GAMES  ...................................................................................................... 90

Unit 9:

CITIES OF THE WORLD  ................................................................................................ 103

Test yourself 3  .........................................................................................................................................

116

Unit 10:

OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE  .................................................................................. 119

Unit 11:

OUR GREENER WORLD................................................................................................

Unit 12:

ROBOTS  .............................................................................................................................. 136

Test yourself 4  .........................................................................................................................................

128

145

View more...

Comments

Copyright ©2017 KUPDF Inc.
SUPPORT KUPDF